Home

3Com H3C Owner's Manual

1. Table 41 Interface attributes of MIM 1GEF MIM 2GEF Description Attribute MIM 1GEF MIM 2GEF Transm Type Multi m Single Long haul 1310 nm Long haul Ultra long 1550 itting ode mode 1550nm nm optical short ha medium power ul 850 haul nm 1310 nm Min 9 5 9dBm 2 dBm 4 dBm 4 dBm dBm Max OdBm 3dBm 5dBm 1 dBm 2 dBm Receiver 17dBm 20dBm 23 dBm 21 dBm 22 dBm sensitivity Central 8 0nm 1310 1310 nm 1550nm 1550 nm wavelength nm Fiber type 62 5 12 9 125 9 125 um single mode 9 125 um 9 125 um single 5 um um single mode multi m single mode ode mode Max 0 55km 10km 40 km 24 86 mi 40 km 70 km 43 50 mi transmission 0 34 6 21 24 86 segment mi mi mi Operating 1000 Mbps mode Full duplex MIM 1GEF panel is shown in the following figure Figure 70 MIM 1GEF panel AN us TXISEPIRX i o 1GEF 1GEF es ACT 000 eno YTI ay MIM 2GEF panel is shown in the following figure Figure 71 MIM 2GEF pane U U UNK TXISFPIRX TXISEFPIRX LINK aer O O see ED Base SI 1 The following table describes the LEDs on the MIM 1GEF MIM 2GEF panel Interface Cable Connecting the Interface Optic Fiber N MIM 1GEF MIM 2GEF
2. T fy a a ae ay Be ON V YV V SIC Ll a TSIN BRI S T I TT IT 11 k Figure 52 SIC 2BS pane 1 B2 ON UN B2 OO st ACT ISDN PRI S TO ISDN BRI STi ACT ie 2BS Figure 53 SIC 1BU panel Be ON U z U Oo Oo SIC BL ACT ISDN BRIU 1BU Figure 54 SIC 2BU panel B2 ON ON Be Oo Oo Oo OO sic a ACT ISDN BRI UO ISDN BRI Ui ACT a cE Interface Cable N Connecting the Interface Cable N SIC 1BS SIC 2BS amp SIC 1BU SIC 2BU 57 The following table describes the LEDs on SIC 1BS SIC 2BS and SIC 1BU SIC 2BU panels Table 30 LEDs on SIC 1BS SIC 2BS and SIC 1BU SIC 2BU panels LED Description B1 OFF indicates the B1 channel is idle Blinking indicates the B1 channel is being used for data communication B2 OFF indicates the B2 channel is idle Blinking indicates the B1 channel is being used for data communication ACT OFF indicates the inactive state Steady ON indicates the active state ON OFF indicates interface card is powered off ON indicates the interface card is powered on Both SIC 1BS SIC 2BS and SIC 1BU SIC 2BU use the telephone cable with ferrite core CAUTION The corresponding cables of SIC 1BS SIC 2BS and SIC 1BU SIC 2BU are included in their standard shipment packages CAUTION a When con
3. ww ag gt 16FSW Br ydy A Bi yg yl e6 16FSw OBASE TMO0BASE TX 1 DMIM 24FSW DMIM 24FSW PoE panel is shown in the following figure Figure 146 DMIM 24FSW DMIM 24FSW PoE panel 24FSW MOBABE THOODASETH 000BABET EI a fs On the panel each 10 100 Mbps interface corresponds to a green LED The following table describes the status of these LEDs Table 87 Description of the MIM 16FSW MIM 16FSW PoE DMIM 24FSW DMIM 24FSW PoE FE LEDs LED status Description Steady green A link is present but no data is being transmitted and received OFF No link is present Blinking green A link is present and data is being transmitted and received ACT The following tables describe the GE and SFP fiber interface LEDs Table 88 Description of the DMIM 24FSW DMIM 24FSW PoE GE interface LEDs LED status Description OFF No link is present Steady green A gigabit link is present but no data is being transmitted and received Blinking green A gigabit link is present and data is being transmitted
4. i Pos x1 m RS530 DTE cable Figure 189 RS530 DTE cable E a Ea EA H B ME B ii Ea Td Ea Ed Qo ET H IHY X2 Pos B Pos m ms J 4 l K pej S gt Connecting the Interface Cable AN FIC 8ASE FIC 16ASE 159 a RS530 DCE cable Figure 190 RS530 DCE cable XI X2 These cables are optional Please order them together with the FIC SAE card By default they are not provided CAUTION Do not plug or unplug interface cables into or from the FIC SAE card to prevent the device or ports from being impaired Before connecting an FIC SAE card identify the type of the equipment to be connected that is the synchronous asynchronous mode DTE DCE mode and so on signaling criterion required by the access equipment baud rate and line clock Step 1 Identify type of the interface to be connected and then choose the correct synchronous asynchronous serial interface cable Step 2 Plug the DB 28 connector of the cable to the corresponding DB 28 port on the FIC SAE card Step 3 Connect the other end of the cable as follows m If the WAN is a DDN line co
5. LINKIACT 00009000000000000000O 7 O Tm O iT p LPIAL 0900000000000000000O60 I MIM 2T1 panel is similar to that of MIM 2T1 F and they differ only in module name The following figure shows a MIM 2T1 panel Figure 104 MIM 2T1 panel Ti CI I CA II O LINKACT m O O LPIAL 271 m 0 i OO YY HD YC YC m MIM 4T1 panel is similar to that of MIM 4T1 F and they differ in silk screen The following figure shows a MIM 4T1 panel Figure 105 MIM 4T1 panel ooo om O OLNKCTC O 4m O O i O O aml 1000 1000 1 00000002 00027000 Table 53 Description of the LEDs on MIM 1T1 MIM 2T1 MIM 4T1 and MIM 1T1 F MIM 2T1 F MIM 4T1 F panels LED Description LINK ACT ON means the carrier signal has been received OFF means no carrier signal has been received Blinking means data is being transmitted or and received LP AL ON means the interface is in a loopback Blinking means an AIS LFA or RAI alarm signal is present OFF means no loopback or alarm is present Note AIS Alarm indication signal LFA loss of frame alignment RAI Remote alarm indication I
6. O UNWACT O LPIAL i LIUUUUUUUT T The following figure illustrates the FIC 4T1 panel 174 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Figure 213 FIC 4T1 panel o y LPIAL oo Oo UNKIACT LPJAL The following figure illustrates the FIC 1T1 F panel Figure 214 FIC 1T1 F panel o yg LPIAL O IF The following figure illustrates the FIC 2T1 F panel Figure 215 FIC 2T1 F panel f il O UNKIACT LPIAL The following figure illustrates the FIC 4T1 F panel Figure 216 FIC 4T1 F panel LPIAL oo oo UNKIACT LPIAL The following table describes the LEDs on the card panels Interface Cable gt Connecting the Interface Cable N FIC 1T1 FIC 2T1 FIC 4T1 and FIC 1T1 F FIC 2T1 F FIC 4T1 F A75 Table 119 LEDs on the FIC T1 and FIC T1 F panels LED Description LINK ACT ON means the carrier signal has be
7. H uu uu u g X2 If the cable with the resistance of 75 ohm is needed a 75 ohm to 120 ohm cable adapter one end is BNC connector and the other end is RJ 45 connector which is illustrated in the following figure can be installed Figure 135 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter with BNC connector CAUTION a For the convenience of extending the connection of E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable you can use network interface connector a 7 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable network interface connector 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter are optional accessories Please select one when purchasing a MIM 2VE1 module by default they are not provided For cable pinouts see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual CAUTION a Some measures are taken to protect MIM 2VE1 module Still you are recommended to install a special lightning arrester at the input end of its connection cable to obtain better lightning protection when the cable is led outdoors 120 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES a Read the mark identifying a port before you connect a cable to it making sure it is the correct port Wrong connection tends to damage the MIM and even the Router Step 1 Plug the DB 15 connector of the cable into the DB 15 port on the MIM 2VE1 module and fasten the screws Step 2 Connect the RJ 45 connector of the cable to m The peer
8. Tugay g XI X2 ES X4 XS X6 XT Xa The MIM IMA 4T1 module provides four T1 ports and uses a 4T1 conversion cable At one end of the cable is a DB68 connector for connecting the router and at the other end are four RJ45 connectors for connecting other devices MIM IMA 8T1 provides eight T1 ports and uses an 8T1 conversion cable Follow these steps to connect MIM IMA 4T1 MIM IMA 8T1 interface cable Step 1 Insert the DB68 connector at one end of the 4T1 8T1 conversion cable to the DB68 interface on the MIM IMA 4T1 MIM IMA 8T1 module Step 2 Connect one RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable to a peer device 136 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES Step 3 Power on the router Check the status of the LINK LED on the module panel OFF means the link is in trouble and signal is out of synchronization In this case please check the link MIM 2BSV MIM 4BSV Module Introduction Interface Attributes MIM 2BSV MIM 4BSV is short for 2 port 4 port ISDN BRI S T voice interface module which is mainly used to process ISDN voice traffic In the upstream direction it can be connected to user interfaces on an ISDN switch to receive and decompress compress and transmit ISDN BRI digital voice traffic In the downstream direction the card can be connected to TE devices to allow their vo
9. DococeeceeO z o COOS OO G a O co o o o O a i u Egnu lt ermm a V 35 DCE cable MIM 2SAE MIM 4SAE MIM 8SAE Module 77 Figure 79 V 35 DCE cable B 01010 Pos 28 Ci e o9o9 olo in w 3839 Be B 8596 209 a ml 0950 ED MUN 9695 os XI Ooo pipe Xz nen Sory Y i zma ZME zzo EFS zoo m X 21 DTE cable Figure 80 X 21 DTE cable Pos x2 X m X 21 DCE cable Figure 81 X 21 DCE cable X2 y a RS449 DTE cable Figure 82 RS449 DTE cable a RS449 DCE cable 78 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES gt Connecting the Interface Cable AN N Figure 83 RS449 DCE cable ceg gt B ea p tos X2 a RS530 DTE cable Figure 84
10. CAUTION If outdoor cabling is involved you need to install a special lightning arrester at the input end of the ISDN BRI S T interface cable to avoid lightning strike a When connecting the interface cable pay attention to the mark on the interface to avoid wrong insertion which may damage the interface card or even the router host Step 1 Identify the operating mode of the BSV interface If the interface is to be connected to an ISDN network it should operate in user mode if the interface is to be connected to a TE device such as a digital phone or another BSV interface in user mode the interface should operate in network mode Step 2 Connect the cable To connect the module to an ISDN network identify the type of the ISDN line provided by your telecommunications service provider m If it is an ISDN U interface line use an NT1 for conversion Insert one end of the S T interface cable into the S T interface on the NT1 and the other end to a BSV interface on the MIM 2BSV MIM 4BSV m If it is an ISDN S T interface line directly connect the cable to a BSV interface on the MIM 2BSV MIM 4BSV To connect the module to a TE device use a crossover S T interface cable Connect the RJ 45 plug at one end of the cable to the MIM 2BSV MIM 4BSV interface the RJ 45 receptacle to the straight through S T interface cable and then the straight through cable to the TE device MIM 1CPOS Module 139
11. DFIC 24FSW DFIC 24FSW PoE panel is shown in the following figure Figure 257 DFIC 24FSW DFIC 24FSW PoE panel M Lipa M Mi Mi ABASETHMBASETH On the FIC 16FSW FIC 16FSW PoE DFIC 24FSW DFIC 24FSW PoE panel each port on the network connector corresponds with one green LED The following table describes the LEDs on the FIC 16FSW FIC 16FSW PoE DFIC 24FSW DFIC 24FSW PoE panel Table 154 LEDs on the FIC 16FSW FIC 16FSW PoE DFIC 24FSW DFIC 24FSW PoE FE interface LED Description Steady green A link is present but no data is being transmitted and received OFF No link is present Blinking green A link is present and data is being transmitted and received ACT The following table describes the LEDs on the GE port and SFP fiber interface Table 155 LEDs on the FIC 16FSW FIC 16FSW PoE DFIC 24FSW DFIC 24FSW PoE GE interface LED Description OFF No link is present Steady green A 1000 Mbps link is present but no data is being transmitted and received Blinking green A 1000 Mbps link is present and data is being transmitted and received ACT Steady yellow A 100 Mbps link is present but no data is being transmitted and received
12. The following figure illustrates the FIC 1ATM OC3SM panel Figure 231 FIC 1ATM OC3SM panel CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT C JATHOCISM The following figure illustrates the FIC 1ATM OC3SML panel Figure 232 FIC 1ATM OC3SML panel D GLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT C TATH OGISHIL The following table describes the LEDs on the card panels Table 134 LEDs on the ATM card panels LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present 190 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Interface Optical Fiber A AN Table 134 LEDs on the ATM card panels LED Description ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received on the interface and blinking means data is being transmitted and or received WARNING Laser danger Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the fiber optic ports which are connected with lasers To protect your eyes against radiation harm never stare into an open fiber optic port CAUTION The FIC 1ATM OC3SML provides a long haul fiber interface It requires transmission distance at least longer than 25 km 15 5 in otherwise the interface cannot receive signals The FIC 1ATM OC3MM must be connected using the multi mode optical fiber whereas the FIC 1ATM OC3SM FIC 1ATM OC3SML must be connected using the single mode optical fiber FIC 1G SHDSL Introduction I
13. The following figure illustrates the FIC 4E1 panel Figure 196 FIC 4E1 panel O LINK OO rE1 PRI The following figure illustrates the FIC 1E1 F panel Figure 197 FIC 1E1 F panel 6 1EtF cET PRI ee The following figure illustrates the FIC 2E1 F panel Figure 198 FIC 2E1 F panel C 2E F The following figure illustrates the FIC 4E1 F panel Figure 199 FIC 4E1 F panel o LINK OO AT OO 01 OO LINK OO ACT 23 cEt PRI Cl mara 1 TOE The following table describes the LEDs on the card panels 164 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Interface Cable Table 113 LEDs on the FIC E1 and FIC E1 F panels LED Description LINK ON means the carrier signal has been received OFF means no carrier signal has been received ACTIVE OFF means no data is being transmitted or received on the interface Blinking means data is being transmitted and or received Interface cable of the FIC 1E1 FIC 2E1 and the FIC 1E1 F FIC 2E1 F Interface cables for the FIC 1E1 FIC 2E1 and FIC 1E1 F FIC 2E1 F are G 703 compliant cables also known as E1 cables The cables are divided into two categories 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial and 120 ohm balanced twisted pair a 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial cable As shown in the following figure at the router end of the cable is a DB 15 pl
14. The status description of the LEDs on SIC 1FEA panel is listed in the following table Table 2 Description of the LEDs on SIC 1FEA panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received Blinking means data is being received or and transmitted Normally category 5 twisted pair cable is adopted to connect the 10BASE T 100BASE TX Ethernet interface to the Ethernet as shown in the following figure Figure 6 Ethernet cable RJ45 RJ45 8 H Ethernet cables fall into two categories straight through cables and crossover cables specifically 1 Connecting the Interface Cable SIC 1SAE Introduction Interface Attributes SIC 1SAE 23 a Straight through cable the wire sequences of the twisted pair cable crimped in the RJ 45 connectors at both ends are completely the same It is used to connect terminal devices such as PCs routers to Hubs or LAN Switches a Crossover cable The wire sequences of twisted pair cable crimped in the RJ 45 connectors at both ends are different It can be used to connect two terminal devices such as PCs and Routers You can such kind of cables by yourself if necessary For the pinouts identification and making methods of these two kinds of network cables see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual If the SIC has
15. ir 3 m P 4FSW i T ll The following figure illustrates the DSIC 9FSW DSIC 9FSW PoE panel Figure 35 DSIC OFSW DSIC 9FSW PoE panel DSIC 4 5 6 7 a ph DSIC 9FSW fly FT CT To TH TT On the panel each port corresponds with one green LED The following table describes the LEDs on the panel Y v qT 4 4 V Nr V Interface Cable Connecting the Interface Cable N SIC 4FSW SIC 4FSW POE DSIC 9FSW DSIC 9FSW PoE 41 Table 15 LEDs on the panel LED Description Steady ON A link is present but there is no data being transmitted or received OFF No link is present Blinking A link is present and there is data being transmitted and received ACT In addition there is a POE LED on each board which is provided for the corresponding boards SIC 4FSW POE and DSIC 9FSW POE with the POE function Normally category 5 twisted pair cable is adopted to connect the 10BASE T 100BASE TX Ethernet interface to the Ethernet as shown in the following figure Figure 36 Ethernet cable RJ45 RJ45 HU Ethernet cables fall into two categories straight through cables and crossover cables specifically a Straight through cable the wire sequences of the twisted pair cable crimp
16. The following figure illustrates the FIC 2E amp M panel Figure 237 FIC 2E amp M panel D Li O O LMK ACT O O ACT The following figure illustrates the FIC 4FXS panel Interface Cable b gt FIC 2FXS FIC 2FXO FIC 2E amp M and FIC 4FXS FIC 4FXO FIC 4E amp 8M 195 Figure 238 FIC 4FXS panel O uNK O O ast The following figure illustrates the FIC 4FXO panel Figure 239 FIC 4FXO panel Unk O UNK C O aT O The following figure illustrates the FIC 4E amp M panel Figure 240 FIC 4E amp M panel D UNK O UK O UNK ACT ACT ACT 4E amp M O O O Oac ae M 1 2 2 i i Enno Table 140 LEDs on the FIC FXS FIC FXO FIC E amp M panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means the channel is idle ON means there is call activity a RJ 45 receptacles on the FIC FXO FIC FXS FIC E amp M cards adopt RJ 45 connectors a The
17. Blinking yellow A 100 Mbps link is present and data is being transmitted and received ACT gt Interface Cable Connecting the Interface Optic Fiber N FIC 1 6FSWIFIC 1 6FSW POE DFIC 24FSWIDFIC 24FSW PoE 211 Table 156 LEDs on the FIC 16FSW FIC 16FSW PoE DFIC 24FSW DFIC 24FSW PoE fiber interface LED Description OFF No link is present Steady green A link is present but no data is being transmitted and received Blinking green A link is present and data is being transmitted and received ACT Steady yellow Error prompt In addition there is a POE LED on each card which is provided for the corresponding boards FIC 16FSW PoE and DFIC 24FSW PoE with the PoE function The two GE interfaces on the DFIC 24FSW PoE do not support the PoE function Normally category 5 twisted pair cable is adopted to connect the 10BASE T 100BASE TX Ethernet interface to the Ethernet as shown in the following figure Figure 258 Ethernet cable RJ45 RJ45 a HE Ethernet cables fall into two categories straight through cables and crossover cables specifically 8 1 a Straight through cable The sequences of the twisted pairs crimped by RJ 45 connectors at both ends are the same It is used for the connection between a terminal device e g PC and router and a Hub LAN Switch The cables delivered with the Router are straight through cables m Crossover cable The s
18. FIC 1VE1 C 1VT1 C 2VE1 C 2VT1 C 16FSW DFIC 24FSW FIC OAP FIC ASM FIC OAP A FIC 1 6FSW POE DFIC 24FSW POE FIC 1FE FIC 2FE FIC 4FE FIC 1GBE FIC 2GBE FIC 1GEF FIC 2GEF FIC 2SAE F F F F F F F F F F F C 4SAE C 8SAE C 8ASE C 16ASE C 1E1 C 2E1 C 4E1 FIC 8E1 75 FIC 8E1 120 FlC 1E1 F FIC 2E1 F FIC 4E1 F FIC 8E1 75 F C 8E1 120 F C 1T1 C 2T1 C 4T1 C 8T1 C 1T1 F C 2T1 F C 4T1 F F F F F F F F F x x x x x x lt lt ee eee eee ee ee ee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee eee eH SI ESM VPM VCPM Purchase Guide 239 Table 179 FIC DFIC options Interface card 20 20 20 40 50 40 type 20 21 20 40 30 11 30 16 30 20 30 60 50 60 FIC 8T1 F x x x x x x y FIC 4BSE x x x x x x y FIC 1CE3 x x x x x x y FIC 1CT3 x x x x x x y FIC 2FXS x x x x x x y FIC 4FXS x x x x x x y FIC 2FXO x x x x x x V FIC 4FXO x x x x x x y FIC HNDE x x x x x x V FIC 1POS x x x x x x y FIC 2EM x x x x x x y FIC 4EM x x x x x x V FIC 1G SHDSL x x x x x x V FIC 1ATM OC3M x x x x x x V M FIC 1ATM OC3SM x x x x x x y L FIC 1ATM OC3SM x x x x x x y FIC 1AE3 x x x x x x V FIC 1AT3 x x x x x x y FIC 1CPOS E x x x x x x v FIC 1CPOS T x x x x x x y FIC IMA 4T x x x x x x y FIC IMA 8T x x x x x x V FIC IMA 4E1 120 x x x x x x y FIC IMA 4E1 75 x x x x x x V FIC IMA 8E1 120 x x x x x x y FIC IMA 8E1 75 x x x x x x y FIC 1SHL 4W x x x x x x y FIC 2BSV x x x x x x y FIC 4BSV x x x x x x y FI
19. i gt Given a FIC 8E1 card the system automatically creates a serial interface for each timeslot bundle formed on a controller E1 interface Interface Attributes The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC 8E1 FIC 8E1 F cards Table 116 Interface attributes of the FIC 8E1 FIC 8E1 F card Description Attribute FIC 8E1 FIC 8E1 F 75 ohm FIC 8E1 FIC 8E1 F 120 ohm Connector DB 68 Number of 1 connectors Interface standard G 703 Interface rate 2 048 Mbps Cable type 75 ohm 8E1 conversion cable 120 ohm 8E1 conversion cable Operating mode E1 CE1 ISDN PRI only supported by the FIC 8E1 FE1 only supported by the FIC 8E1 F Supported service 1 Backup 2 Terminal access service 3 ISDN PRI only supported by the FIC 8E1 Interface LEDs FIC 8E1 and FIC 8E1 F panels are similar The following figures illustrate the FIC 8E1 panels Figure 207 FIC 8E1 120 ohm panel 8E1 128 D ux OOOO ar oooo 9 OOOO UK G ee P OOOO aT 23 ENcEUPRI 4s T 8E1 120 J EEIEIIE TEUSEEHEHH Figure 208 FIC 8E1 75 ohm panel 11 11 11 11 11 r 8E1075 O uK OOOO AMT OOOO gq an OOOO UN C OOOO Att 4123 EAlcEUPRI 4807 8E1075 u Li rommer remm FIC 8E1 FIC 8E1 F 171 The following t
20. m Five types of 1000Base SX 1000Base LX SFP modules multi mode short haul 850 nm single mode medium haul 1310 nm single mode long haul 1310 nm single mode long haul 1550 nm and single mode ultra long haul 1550 nm m Operation at 1000 Mbps a Full duplex The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC 1GEF FIC 2GEF Table 106 Interface attributes of the FIC 1GEF FIC 2GEF Attribute FIC 1GEF FIC 2GEF Connector SFP Number of 1 2 interfaces Interface 802 3 802 3u 802 3ab standard Optical Type Multi mode Single mode Long haul Long haul Ultra long haul transmi short haul medium ha 1310nm 1550 nm 1550 nm tter 850 nm ul 1310 power nm Min 9 5 dBm 9 dBm 2 dBm 4 dBm 4 dBm Max 0 dBm 3 dBm 5 dBm 1 dBm 2 dBm Receiver 17 dBm 20 dBm 23 dBm 21 dBm 22 dBm sensitivity Central 850 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm wavelength 152 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Table 106 Interface attributes of the FIC 1GEF FIC 2GEF Attribute FIC 1GEF FIC 2GEF Fiber type 62 5 125 9 125 um 9 125 um 9 125 um 9 125 um single um single mode single mode single mode mode multi mode Max 0 55 km 10 km 6 21 40 km 40 km 24 86 70 km 43 50 transmission 0 34 mi mi 24 86 mi mi mi segment Operating mode 1000 Mbps Full duplex Interface LEDs The following figures illustrate the FIC 1GEF and FIC 2GEF panels Figure 175 FIC 1GEF panel
21. Interface Attributes SIC 8AS the 8 port asynchronous serial interface card is mainly used to transceive and process the asynchronous data streams SIC 8AS has these features m Each asynchronous serial port provides a rate up to 115 2 Kbps m Supports the terminal access service and asynchronous dedicated line m Serves as the small medium sized ISP dial up access server when an asynchronous serial port is used for dial up The following table describes the interface attributes of SIC 8AS Table 35 Interface attributes of SIC 8AS Attribute Description Connector DB60 Number of connectors 1 Interface cable Customized cable with 8 port RJ 45 connector Interface standard RS232 Minimum baud rate 300 bps Maximum baud rate 115 2 Kbps 64 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS Table 35 Interface attributes of SIC 8AS Attribute Description Supported services Modem dial up Backup Terminal access service Asynchronous dedicated line Interface LEDs The following figure illustrates the SIC 8AS front panel Figure 61 SIC 8AS front panel Oe 1A 24 34 4 mT 4 f ror TT The following table describes the LEDs on the SIC 8AS panel SIG asa re BAS UU l Jl Jl ll Table 36 LEDs on SIC 8AS panel LED Des
22. uK O C T EE ATO EE ru y Figure 176 FIC 2GEF panel O TX SFPIRK TX SFP C UNK O UNK AGT TO 2GEF S oo amp 2BEF The following table describes the LEDs on the FIC 1GEF and FIC 2GEF panels Table 107 LEDs on the FIC 1GEF FIC 2GEF panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received blinking means data is being received or and transmitted Interface Cable For FIC 1GEF and FIC 2GEF cards select optical fibers depending on the type of the installed 1000Base SX 1000 Base LX SFP As the interfaces that these SFP modules provide use LC type fiber optic connectors you must use fibers with LC type connectors for them gt Connecting the Interface Optic Fiber N FIC 2SAE FIC 4SAE FIC 8SAE 153 Figure 177 LC type fiber optic connector a C type fiber optic connectors were compact fiber optic connectors developed by Lucent a The fibers are provided depending on the purchased SFPs Therefore please provide information on the SFPs when purchasing FICs by default the fibers are not provided CAUTION When connecting the optical fiber observe the following a Do not over bend the optical fiber Its curvature radius must be no less than 10 cm 3 9 in a Ensure that the Tx and Rx ends are correctly connected a Ensure that the fiber ends are
23. 8BIT SxShield grounding OFF RxShield is AY CAUTION mode selection switch grounded via capacitance ON RxShield is grounded directly a t s recommended to select the DIP switch of MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 and MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F modules in this way when connecting 75 ohm cable flip BIT1 8 to ON and when connecting 120 ohm cable flip BIT1 8 to OFF Positions of DIP switches can only be changed by the trained personnel Connecting the Interface Cable A MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F Modules 87 a By default all of the DIP switches of MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 and MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F modules are factory configured to ON that is the impedance of E1 interface is 75 ohm CAUTION a Read the mark identifying a port before you connect a cable to it making sure it is the correct port Wrong connection tends to damage interface modules and even the Router a Some protection measures are taken for MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 and MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F modules Still you are recommended to install a special lightning arrester at the input end of the cable leading to the outdoors in order to protect the line against lightning strikes more efficiently Connecting interface cable of MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 and MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F modules Step 1 Check the type of E1 cable and set the DIP switches of MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 or MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F module correctly Step 2 Plug
24. Connector DB68 Number of 1 connectors Interface ITU G 703 ITU G 704 standard Interface rate 2 048 Mbps 132 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES Interface LEDs Interface Cable Table 90 Interface attributes of the MIM IMA 4E1 MIM IMA 8E1 Description MIM IM A 4E1 75 ohm MIM IMA 8E1 MIM IMA 4E1 MIM IMA 8E1 Attribute 75 ohm 120 ohm 120 ohm Cable type 75 ohm 4E1 75 ohm 8E1 120 ohm 4E1 120 ohm conversion cable conversion cable conversion cable 8E1 conversio n cable Max 500 m 1640 4 ft 150 m 492 1 ft transmission distance Operating mode ATM E1 independent link IMA bundle mode Supported AAL5 ATM adaptation layer 5 service Protocol PPPoA PPPoEoA IPoA IPOEOA Service type CBR VBR rt VBR nrt UBR The following figures illustrate the MIM IMA 4E1 and MIM IMA 8E1 panels Figure 148 MIM IMA 4E1 75 ohm panel Figure 149 MIM IMA 8E1 75 ohm panel The LEDs on the MIM IMA 4E1 panel have the same functionality as those on the MIM IMA 8E1 panel The following table describes these LEDs Table 91 Description of the LEDs on the IMA 4E1 IMA 8E1 panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received ON means data is being transmitted or received The MIM IMA 4E1 module provides four E1 ports and uses a 120 ohm or 75 ohm 4E1 conversion cable The two types of 4E1 conversion cables look similar
25. Description STATUS ACTIVE Solid green Power is being supplied to the FIC HNDE normally OFF The card is not powered the power supply of the card has failed or a serious hardware fault occurs OFF after two second flashing yellow The card finishes initialization Blinking The card operates normally and data is being transmitted or received OFF The card is operating normally but not sending or receiving data Troubleshooting You may learn how well the encryption card is operating by reading the LEDs on it For the correct LED behaviors refer to Table 143 Table 144 Troubleshooting by reading the LED behaviors Incorrect LED behaviors Reason Action to take STATUS LED remains OFF at The card or some hardware 1 Check that the power router startup parts on the card are not supply of the router is supplied with power properly correctly connected 2 Check that the power is being supplied 3 Contact your sales agent for help the power supply of the card may have been damaged or anomalies have occurred to the CPLD FIC 2VE1 199 Table 144 Troubleshooting by reading the LED behaviors Incorrect LED behaviors Reason Action to take ACTIVE LED remains OFF at device startup 1 Check that the card is securely connected to the host The encryption processor failed to initialize the configurations possibly due to a system bus problem 2 Contact your sales agent for help
26. Interface SONET OC 3 SDH STM 1 standard Number of 1 interfaces Interface rate 155 52 Mbps Optical Type Multi mode Single mode Single mode Single mode transmi short haul medium haul long haul ultra long haul tter Min 19 0 dBm 15 0 dBm 5 0 dBm 5 0 dBm power Max 14 0 dBm 8 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm Receiver 30 0 dBm 28 0 dBm 34 0 dBm 34 0 dBm sensitivity Overload optical 14 0 dBm 7 0 dBm 9 0 dBm 10 0 dBm power Central 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm wavelength Fiber type 62 5 125 um 9 125 um single 9 125 um single 9 125 um single multi mode mode mode mode Max 2 km 1 2 mi 15 km 9 3 mi 40 km 24 9 mi 80 km 49 7 mi transmission segment The following figure illustrates the FIC 1POS panel Figure 234 FIC 1POS panel D PGS O LIK AETME SFP 1884 POS The following table describes the LEDs on the FIC 1POS panel Table 138 LEDs on the FIC 1POS panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received blinking means data is being received or and transmitted Like the FIC 1CPOS the FIC 1POS uses optical fibers with LC type connectors Step 1 Insert the SFP card into its corresponding slot AN FIC 2FXS FIC 2FXO FIC 2E amp M and FIC 4FXS FIC 4FXO FIC 4E amp M 193 Step 2 Locate the Rx and Tx fiber optic interfaces on the
27. OFF means no carrier signal has been received Blinking means data is being transmitted or and received LP AL ON means the interface is in a loopback Blinking means an AIS LFA or RAI alarm signal is present OFF means no loopback or alarm is present Note AIS Alarm indication signal LFA loss of frame alignment RAI Remote alarm indication Refer to FIC 1CE3 on page 178 The interface cable for the FIC 1CT3 is the same as that for the FIC 1CE3 and is connected in the same way FIC 4BSE Introduction Interface Attributes FIC 4BSE the four port ISDN BRI interface card transmits receives and processes four channels of ISDN BRI S T data traffic on ISDN BRI S T interfaces The FIC 4BSE differs from the FIC 4BS only in the way they set matched resistance for an ISDN BRI S T interface the FIC 4BS uses jumpers while the FIC 4BSE uses DIP switches The FIC 4BSE can work in dial mode or leased line mode The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC 4BSE Table 126 Interface attributes of the FIC 4BSE Attribute Description Connector RJ 45 Number of connectors 4 182 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Table 126 Interface attributes of the FIC 4BSE Attribute Description Cable SDN S T cable Protocol amp standard TU T 1 430 O 921 O 931 Operating mode ISDN dial up SDN leased line Supported service ISDN SDN supplementary services Multi user number Sub ad
28. certain numbers of VPM should also be installed on the main board for MSCA board of the router If there is an RTV SIC 1E1 T1 module on the router but no VCPM or VPM card is installed the router may operate abnormally A router installed with no RTV SIC 1E1 T1 module If there is no RTV SIC 1E1 T1 module in the system no VCPM and VPM are needed on a router However when a router is installed with voice E1 T1 module of other types and there is data exchange between voice E1 T1 modules the main board of the router should be installed with VCPM card VPM should be installed as needed 234 CHAPTER 5 ESM VCPM MODULE INTERFACE CARD AND INTERFACE A MODULE PURCHASE GUIDE This Appendix tells you the types of interface modules that each model of H3C MSR 20 30 50 Series Routers can accommodate In the tables V means Supported and x means Not supported i gt For H3C MSR 20 40 and MSR 30 and 50 series routers which have four SIC slots a 4FSWI1FEF 1FEA 1GEC TADSL 1ADSL I interface card can only be installed in slot SIC 2FXO SIC 1 ADSL I 2 or slot 4 SIC DSIC Purchase Guide Table 177 SIC DSIC options Interface card 20 20 20 40 50 40 type 20 21 20 40 30 11 30 16 30 20 30 60 50 60 SIC 1GEC y V y y y y y SIC 4FSW y y y y y y y DSIC 9FSW x y x y y y y SIC 1VE1 x y x V y y y SIC 1VT1 x y x V y y y SIC 4FSW POE x x x y y y y DSIC 9FSW POE x x x y y y y SIC 1BS V y y y y y y SIC 2BS x y x y y y y SIC
29. oana Ne Wee ae WU i PHONE aag Ll Lt tt Ct rt Ll 1 Figure 31 SIC 1FXO panel G oa aoa Aa T UNE Ne AA ho SIC ACT CINE aaa 1FXU L Ll Ci TI CT Ti Lt i m SIC 2FXS SIC 2FXO panel Figure 32 SIC 2FXS panel LINK LINK oO O sic Em PHONEO PHONEL ACT ae Figure 33 SIC 2FXO panel LINK LINK sic RET LINEO LINE AE EFAN Interface Cable N Connecting the Interface Cable N SIC 4FSW SIC 4FSW Po E DSIC 9FSW DSIC 9FS W PoE Introduction SIC 4FSW SIC 4FSW PoE DSIC 9FSWIDSIC 9FSW PoE 39 The status description of the LEDs of SIC 1FXS SIC 1FXO and SIC 2FXS SIC 2FXO is shown in the following table Table 13 Description of the LEDs on SIC 1FXS SIC 1FXO and SIC 2FXS SIC 2FXO panels LED Description LINK OFF means the link is idle ON means the link is being occupied for call connection ACT OFF means the link is idle ON means the link is being occupied for communication Connection cables for SIC 1FXS SIC 1FXO and SIC 2FXS SIC 2FXO are telephone cables with ferrite core Both ends of the cables are RJ11 connectors For cable pinouts see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual CAUTION The standard shipment package of SIC 1FXS SIC 1FXO and SIC 2FXS SIC 2FXO includes a ferrite core telephone cable CAUTION a You should connect a cable to the port with the correct mark Misplugging is prone to impair the SIC MIM and even damage the router m When the telephon
30. other end of the network connector to the network equipment through a 120 ohm E1 trunk cable if cable extension is needed Figure 44 Extending an E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable DB 15 RJ 45 RJ 45 Network J s devices such Router as DDN P Network interface connector 120 ohm balanced twisted pair 120 ohm E1 trunk cable Step 4 Check the status of LINK LED on the SIC 1VE1 panel ON means the link is connected and OFF means the link is not connected In the latter case check the line 1 port T1 voice interface card SIC 1VT1 can handle dense voice signals in VoIP system It provides a CT1 PRI R2 port allowing the access of 23 channels of voice signals When purchasing a SIC 1VT1 interface card users should purchase a VCPM and configure a VPM based on voice traffic No VCPM is required but only a VPM needs to be installed on the main board when MSR 20 1x series routers need to be equipped with a SIC 1VT1 interface card VCPM and VPM need to be installed on the main board when MSR 30 series routers need to be equipped with a SIC 1VT1 interface card VCPM and VPM need to be installed on the MSCA card when MSR 50 series routers need to be equipped with a SIC 1VT1 interface card Table 23 Interface Attributes of the SIC 1T1 F Attribute Description Connector RJ45 Number of connector 1 50 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS Table 23 Interface A
31. received blinking means data is being received or and transmitted Interface Optical Fiber ae gt MIM 1AE3 Module 107 MIM 1AMM uses multi mode optical cable and MIM 1ASM MIM 1ASL uses single mode optical cable As all these three modules adopt SC optical fiber connector the connector of the connection cable should also be SC connector The external optical cable suite provides you with optical cables of different lengths WARNING Laser danger Do not directly stare at the optical fiber connector connected with the laser in case of the injury that may cause to your eyes CAUTION a MIM 1ASL module adopts long haul fiber interface requiring a transmission at least longer than 25 km 15 5 in If the transmission distance is lower than 25km the interface will be unable to receive signals a MIM 1AMM module should be connected with multi mode optical fibers whereas MIM 1ASM MIM 1ASL modules should be connected with single mode optical fibers These cables are optional Please order them when purchasing MIM 1AMM MIM 1ASM MIM 1ASL modules by default they are not provided MIM 1AE3 Module Introduction gt Interface Attributes 1 port 34 368 Mbps ATM E3 interface module MIM 1AE3 supports a Two ATM cell mapping modes ATM Direct Mapping ADM and Physical Layer Convergence Protocol PLCP a Scrambling in data transmission a Both line clock when working as DTE interface and internal clock when wo
32. 1 Straight through cable the wire sequences of the twisted pair cable crimped in the RJ 45 connectors at both ends are completely the same It is used to connect terminal devices such as PCs routers to Hubs or LAN Switches m Crossover cable The wire sequences of twisted pair cable crimped in the RJ 45 connectors at both ends are different It can be used to connect two terminal devices such as PCs and Routers For the pinouts identification and making methods of these two kinds of network cables see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual Connecting Ethernet fiber interface cable CAUTION When connecting optical fiber note that u Do not bend optical fiber with undue stress The bend radius should be no less than 10 cm 3 9 in a Ensure that the Tx interface and Rx interface of the module are connected correctly m Keep the sectional surface of optical fiber clean and free from dust WARNING Laser Danger Do not observe the optical fiber connector connected with laser otherwise laser may damage your eyes Step 1 Plug SFP module into the corresponding SFP module slot Step 2 Locate the Rx optical port and Tx optical port on the module Plug one end of optical fiber into the Rx port of the module and the other end into the Tx port of the peer device Plug one end of another optical fiber into the Tx port of the module and the other end into the Rx port of the peer device Step 3 Check the stat
33. 24FSW modules can work as a switching routing integrated device on a small sized enterprise network to connect PCs and network devices inside the network directly The interfaces provided on the FIC 16FSW FIC 16FSW PoE and DFIC 24FSW DFIC 24FSW PoE are as follows FIC 16FSW FIC 16FSW PoE provides a 16 10 100 Mbps RJ45 connector interfaces on the FIC 16FSW module m One 10 100 1000 Mbps gigabit RJ45 connector electrical interfaces on the FIC 16FSW module FIC 1 6FSW IFIC 1 6FSW PoE DFIC 24FSWI DFIC 24FSW PoE 209 m 1 SFP fiber interface Fiber interfaces and gigabit electrical interfaces share the MAC layer on the FIC 16FSW module DFIC 24FSW DFIC 24FSW PoE provides a 24 10 100 Mbps RJ45 connector interfaces on the DFIC 24FSW module m 2 10 100 1000 Mbps gigabit RJ45 connector electrical interfaces on the DMIM 24FSW module a 2 SFP fiber interfaces Fiber interfaces and gigabit electrical interfaces share the MAC layer on the DMIM 24FSW module By default the electrical interfaces take effect The modules support m 100 meters 328 1 ft of transmission distance over the category 5 twisted pair cable m 100 meters 328 1 ft of transmission distance between any interfaces over the category 5 twisted pair cable m Operation at 100 Mbps and 10 Mbps autosensing a Full duplex and half duplex with the former in common use Interface Attributes The interface attributes of the FIC 16FSW DFIC 24FSW are given in the following tab
34. 4T 1 and FIC 1T1 F FIC 2T1 F FIC 4T1 F Introduction Interface Attributes CAUTION Before you connect a port read its label carefully a wrong connection may impair the interface card and even damage the device You are recommended to install a special lightning arrester at the input end of the interface cable for better lightning protection Step 1 Choose an 8E1 conversion cable appropriate to the interface type of the device to be connected m f the interface impedance of the device is 75 ohm use a 75 ohm 8E1 conversion cable m f the interface impedance of the device is 120 ohm use a 120 ohm 8E1 conversion cable Step 2 Insert the DB 68 connector of the cable to the DB 68 port on the FIC 8E1 FIC 8E1 F card and fasten the cable fastening screws Step 3 Identify the seguence number of the other end of the 8E1 4E1 conversion cable and connect it with a peer device Step 4 Power on the router Check the behavior of the LINK LED on the card panel OFF means fault has occurred on the line and signal is out of synchronization Check the line status FIC 1T1 FIC 2T1 FIC 4T1 FIC 1T1 FIC 2T1 FIC 4T1 the 1 2 4 port channelized T1 PRI interface card transmits receives and processes T1 data traffic In addition you can use the card for other purposes such as CT1 access and the ISDN PRI function FIC 1T1 F FIC 2T1 F FIC 4T1 F FIC 1T1 F FIC 2T1 F FIC 4T1 F the 1 2 4 port fractional T1 interface card differs fr
35. 5 for data receiving At one end of the cable is an RJ 45 plug for connecting the SIC 1BSV SIC 2BSV interface and at the other end of the cable is an RJ 45 receptacle for connecting a TE device Figure 58 Crossover ISDN S T cable jm TD TH reu li CAUTION a f outdoor cabling is involved you need to install a lightning arrester at the input end of the ISDN BRI S T interface cable to avoid lightning strike a When connecting the interface cable to the interface pay attention to the mark on the interface to avoid wrong insertion which may damage the interface card or even the router host Step 1 Decide the operating mode of the BSV interface If the interface is to be connected to an ISDN network it should operate in user mode if the interface is to be connected to a TE device a digital phone or another BSV interface in user mode for example the interface should operate in network mode Step 2 Connect the cable To connect the interface card to an ISDN network identify the type of the ISDN line provided by your telecommunications service provider a If the line is an ISDN U interface line use an NT1 for conversion Insert one end of the straight through S T interface cable into the S T interface of the NT1 SIC 1FEF 61 and the other end into the BSV interface of the SIC 1BSV SIC 2BSV interface card m
36. CARDS Interface Cable Connecting the Interface Cable Figure 264 FIC IMA 8T1 panel The following table describes the LEDs on the FIC IMA 4T1 FIC IMA 8T1 panel Table 160 LEDs on the FIC IMA 4T1 FIC IMA 8T1 panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received blinking means data is being received or transmitted The FIC IMA 4T1 FIC IMA 8T1 card provides four eight T1 ports and uses a 4T1 8T1 conversion cable for connection At one end of the cable is a DB 68 connector for connecting the router and at the other end are four eight RJ 45 connectors for connecting other devices The following figure illustrates an 8T1 conversion cable Figure 265 8T1 conversion cable j pomme LIE Pos Step 1 Insert the DB 68 connector of the 4T1 8T1 conversion cable to the DB 68 port on the FIC IMA 4T1 FIC IMA 8T1 card Step 2 Connect one RJ 45 connector at the other end of the cable to the peer device to be connected Step 3 Power on the router Check the behavior of the LINK LED on
37. CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS FIC 1VE1 Introduction gt Interface Attributes Interface LEDs 1 port E1 voice interface module FIC 1VE1 can handle dense voice signals in VoIP system It provides a CE1 PRI R2 port allowing the access of 30 channels of voice signals a VCPM is provided to users together with FIC 1VE1 Users can select VPM module as needed a VPM module is installed on the main board of FIC 1VE1 The interface attributes of FIC 1VE1 are given in the following table Table 149 Interface attributes of FIC 1VE1 Attribute Description Connector DB 15 Number of connectors 1 Operating mode CE1 ISDN PRI R2 Interface rate 2 048 Mbps Cable E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable 75ohm to 1200hm adapter Network interface connector Supported service 1 R2 signaling 2 DSS1 signaling 3 IP Fax A General VoIP features in Comware FIC 1VE1 panel is shown in the following figure Figure 250 FIC 1VE1 panel D Mer Q MET TVE l l s 8 eB UPRUR g SSS Description of the LEDs on FIC 1VE1 panel is given in the following table Table 150 Description of the LEDs on FIC 1VE1 panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present Interface Cable FIC 1VE1 205 Table 150 Description of the LEDs on FIC 1VE1 panel LED Description ACTIVE OFF means no data
38. E amp M interface cable Bell V 4 wire PBX Router on hook E M W off hook aed Oe eee a a eee 48V off hook k M E 48V 2 a w detect bB gt on hook TO To 6 4 wi 4 wire wire Lae ws E _ voice signal voice signa T1 T1 5 Table 75 Pinouts of E amp M interface cable Bell V 4 wire Router side RJ 45 Pin RJ 45 interface signal Signal at switch side Bell V 4 wire 1 SB negative power supply 2 E M 3 RINGO RINGO 4 RING1 RING1 5 TIP1 TIP1 6 TIPO TIPO 7 M E 8 SG negative power supply ground gt Because it is hard to determine the type of the switch to be connected and its connectors interface cables of MIM 2E amp M MIM 4E amp M modules have to be prepared according to the on spot conditions or by the user To ensure the EMC of the Router install a ferrite core near the connector of the prepared E amp M module interface cable by the router side Connecting the Interface Cable CAUTION a Some measures are taken to protect MIM 2FXS MIM 2FXO MIM 2E amp M and MIM 4FXS MIM 4FXO MIM 4E amp M Still you are recommended to install a special lightning arrester at the input end of each connection cable to obtain better lightning protection effect when the cable is led outdoors 116 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES a Read the mark identifying a port before you connect a cable to it making su
39. Interface LEDs The following figure illustrates the MIM 4BSE panel The jumpers are placed over jump pins 2 and 3 meaning 100 ohm matched resistances are not used Interface Cable gt Connecting the Interface Cable aN MIM 4BSE Module 103 Figure 114 MIM 4BSE panel U Tl TEU ER pr EHYS Y O Gores U On H0 dowmwopn 5 db o we O Oact O O apse ne ANEA 1 MANAA A Aa4a23 aon The following table describes the LEDs on the module panel Table 62 LEDs on the MIM 4BSE panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being received or transmitted Blinking means data is being received and or transmitted The MIM 4BSE uses straight through ISDN S T cables with pins 3 and 6 for data transmission and pins 4 and 5 for data receiving At both ends of ISDN S T cable are RJ 45 connectors Figure 115 Straight through ISDN S T cable Green Black d The standard equipping package for the MIM 4BSE includes the appropriate interfa
40. Ll FXO l D aTh a h T T f n A 114 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES Interface Cable gt Figure 129 MIM 4E amp M panel o Link ACT Table 74 Description of the LEDs on voice MIM panels LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means the channel is idle ON means there is call activity m RJ 45 receptacles are used as external interfaces for FXS FXO E amp M modules a Telephone cables have been included in the standard shipment package of MIM 2FXS MIM 2FXO and MIM 4FXS MIM 4FXO modules Interface cable of FXS FXO modules Connection cables for MIM 2FXS MIM 2FXO and MIM 4FXS MIM 4FXO are telephone cables with ferrite core For cable pinouts see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual Interface cable of E amp M modules E amp M modules of H3C Series Routers support Bell I Il lll V switches and 2 wire amp 4 wire voice signals It is recommended to use Bell V 4 wire voice signal to communicate with the Router in practice The seguence of E amp M RJ 45 pins is shown in the following figure numbered 1 to 8 from left to right Figure 130 Sequence of RJ 45 pins O N When connection is made in Bell V 4 wire mode the pinouts of RJ 45 receptacles at router side and at the switch side are shown in the following figure MIM 2FXS MIM 2FXO MIM 2E amp M and MIM 4FXS MIM 4FXO MIM 4E amp M 115 Figure 131
41. M and MIM 4FXS MIM 4FXO MIM 4E amp M Table 73 MIM 4FXS MIM 4FXO MIM 4E amp M Attribute 113 Interface attributes of MIM 2FXS MIM 2FXO MIM 2E amp M and Description Interface standard Dial up mode Bandwidth ITU Q 512 compliant subscriber circuit interface MIM 2FXS MIM 4FXS TU Q 552 compliant loop trunk interface MIM 2FXO MIM 4FXO G 712 compliant E amp M trunk interface MIM 2E amp M MIM 4E amp M E amp M interface supporting Bell type Il Ill V and support 2 wire and 4 wire TU K 20 compliant overcurrent and overvoltage protection DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency but not pulse dial up 300 Hz to 3400 Hz Voice MIM panels are shown in the following figures Figure 124 MIM 2FXS panel gt o 4 Figure 125 MIM 2FXO panel e amp UN e O ACT Figure 126 MIM 2E amp M panel N RG SD h jJ e amp LINK N ACT Figure 127 MIM 4FXS panel SA USoSuU a Oe eme urs act FXS Figure 128 MIM 4FXO panel a OoocJMS oy amp e e amp un 4FXO e O ACT
42. OFF means the link is idle Blinking means data is being transmitted or received The connection cables for SIC 1AM SIC 2AM are telephone cables with ferrite core Both ends of the cables are RJ11 connectors For cable pinouts refer to Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual CAUTION Relevant cables are included in the standard shipment package of SIC 1AM SIC 2AM CAUTION a You should connect a cable to the port with the correct mark Misplugging is prone to impair the SIC MIM and even damage the router a You are recommended to install a special lightning arrester on the input end of the telephone line in order to avoid the lightning effects more efficiently If the SIC has been properly installed follow these steps to connect the cable Step 1 Insert the end with ferrite core into one LINE port of SIC 1AM SIC 2AM Step 2 Plug the other end of the cable into the telephone wall jack SIC 1FXS SIC 1FXO amp SIC 2FXS SIC 2FXO Introduction N Interface Attributes 1 2 port voice subscriber circuit interface card SIC 1FXS SIC 2FXS and 1 2 port voice ATO analog trunk interface card SIC 1FXO SIC 2FXO serve to access and handle 1 2 channel s of analog voice signals over data communication networks The differences between SIC FXS and SIC FXO are listed below a SIC FXS cards are analog subscriber line cards that provide ordinary analog telephone and fax access and also can connect ATO loop trunks of exchange
43. RS530 DTE cable Pos 25 vol m RS530 DCE cable Figure 85 RS530 DCE cable XI X2 For the pinouts of synchronous asynchronous serial cables with DB 28 connectors see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual These cables are optional Please select one when purchasing an SAE module by default the cables are not provided WARNING Before plugging or unplugging interface cables connected to an SAE module power off the router Online insertion or removal tends to damage the port and even the device CAUTION Before connecting an SAE module confirm the model of the eguipment to be connected that is the synchronous asynchronous mode DTE DCE mode and so on signaling criterion reguired by the access eguipment baud rate and timing clock MIM 8ASE MIM 16ASE Module 79 Step 1 Choose a synchronous asynchronous serial interface cable depending on the type of the interface on the remote device Step 2 Plug the DB 28 connector of the cable to the appropriate DB28 port on the SAE module Step 3 Connect the other end of the SAE cable to m Port of CSU DSU if the WAN is a DDN line a Serial port on an analog modem if the WAN is a dial up line Step 4 Check the behavior of the LINK LED on the SAE panel It is OFF when
44. SIC 1ADSL I SIC 1BS SIC 2BS amp SIC 1 BU SIC 2BU Introduction Interface Attributes SIC 1BS SIC 2BS is short for 1 2 port ISDN BRI S T interface card which is mainly used to transceive and process of ISDN BRI S T traffic flows SIC 1BU SIC 2BU is short for 1 2 port ISDN BRI U interface card which is mainly used to transceive and process ISDN BRI U traffic flows Both SIC 1BS SIC 2BS and SIC 1BU SIC 2BU have two working modes dial up and leased line The following table describes the interface attributes of SIC 1BS SIC 2BS and SIC 1BU SIC 2BU 56 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS Interface LEDs Table 29 Interface attributes of SIC 1BS SIC 2BS and SIC 1BU SIC 2BU Attribute Description Connector SIC 1BS SIC 2BS RJ45 Number of con Cable type nectors Interface standard Working mode Supported services SIC 1BU SIC 2BU RJ45 or RJ11 1 SIC 1BS SIC 1BU 2 SIC 2BS SIC 2BU Telephone cable with ferrite core ITU T 1 430 Q 921 Q 931 ISDN Dial up ISDN leased line ISDN ISDN supplementary services Multi subscriber number Sub address Backup The following figures illustrate the SIC 1BS SIC 2BS and SIC 1BU SIC 2BU panels Figure 51 SIC 1BS pane
45. SIC DSIC Interface Cards 9 MIM DMIM XMIM 10 FIC DFIC Interface Cards 13 SIC MIM FIC Purchase Guideline 15 Installation Removal of a SIC MIM FIC 16 Troubleshooting 19 SMART INTERFACE CARDS SIC 1FEA 21 SIC 1SAE 23 SIC 1EPRI SIC 1E1 F 28 SIC 1TPRI SIC 1T1 F 33 SIC 1AM SIC 2AM 36 SIC 1FXS SIC 1FXO amp SIC 2FXS SIC 2FXO 37 SIC AFSW SIC 4FSW PoE DSIC OFSW DSIC OFSW PoE 39 SIC 1GEC 42 SIC 1VE1 45 SIC 1VT1 49 SIC 1ADSL 51 SIC 1ADSL 53 SIC 1BS SIC 2BS amp SIC 1BU SIC 2BU 55 SIC 1BSV SIC 2BSV 58 SIC 1FEF 61 SIC 8AS 63 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES MIM 1FE MIM 2FE MIM 4FE Modules 67 MIM 1GBE MIM 2GBE Module 69 MIM 1GEF MIM 2GEF Module 71 MIM 2SAE MIM 4SAE MIM 8SAE Module 74 MIM 8ASE MIM 16ASE Module 79 MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E 1 MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F Modules 81 MIM 8E1 MIM 8E1 F Module 89 MIM 1T1 MIM 2T1 MIM 4T1 MIM 1T1 F MIM 2T1 F MIM 4T1 F Modules 91 MIM 8T1 MIM 8T1 F Module 95 MIM 1CE3 Module 97 MIM 1CT3 Module 98 MIM 4BSE Module 100 MIM 1G SHDSL 104 MIM 1AMM MIM 1ASM MIM 1ASL 105 MIM 1AE3 Module 107 MIM 1AT3 Module 109 MIM 1POS Module 110 MIM 2FXS MIM 2FXO MIM 2E amp M and MIM 4FXS MIM 4FXO MIM 4E amp M 112 MIM HNDE Module 116 MIM 2VE1 Module 117 MIM 2VT1 Module 120 MIM 1VE1 Module 122 MIM 1VT1 Module 125 MIM 16FSW MIM 16FSW PoE DMIM 24FSW DMIM 24FSW PoE 127 MIM IMA 4E1 MIM IMA 8E1 Module 131 MIM IMA 4T1 MIM IMA 8T1 Module 134 MIM 2BSV MIM 4BSV Module 136 MIM 1CPOS Module 139
46. T 1 port dual pair G SHDSL interface module MIM SHL 4W 2 port voice subscriber circuit interface module MIM 2FXS 2 port voice ATO analog trunk interface module MIM 2FXO 2 port voice E amp M analog trunk interface module MIM 2E amp M 4 port voice subscriber circuit interface module MIM 4FXS 4 port voice ATO analog trunk interface module MIM 4FXO 4 port voice E amp M analog trunk interface module MIM 4E amp M 1 port E1 voice interface module MIM 1VE1 1 port T1 voice interface module MIM 1VT1 2 port E1 voice interface module MIM 2VE1 2 port T1 voice interface module MIM 2VT1 2 port ISDN BRI S T voice interface module MIM 2BSV 4 port ISDN BRI S T voice interface module MIM 4BSV Network data encryption module NDEC High performance network data encryption module HNDE FIC DFIC Interface Cards 13 FIC DFIC Interface Cards Ethernet interface cards WAN interface cards The following are the FIC DFIC interface cards available with MSR 50 Series Routers 1 port 10Base T 100Base TX FE interface card FIC 1FE 2 port 10Base T 100Base TX FE interface card FIC 2FE 4 port 10Base T 100Base TX FE interface card FIC 4FE 1 port 10Base T 100Base TX 1000Base T GE electrical interface card FIC 1 GBE 2 port 10Base T 100Base TX 1000Base T GE electrical interface card FIC 2 GBE 1 port 1000Base SX 1000Base LX GE fiber interface card FIC 1GEF 2 port 1000Base SX 1000Base LX GE fiber interface card FIC 2
47. The FE1 operating mode supported by the E1 F cards allows only one n x 64 kbps bundle to be formed on each interface where n 1 to 31 However an E1 card allows arbitrary grouping of 31 channels and multiple bundles m The FIC E1 F cards do not support PRI mode The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC E1 and FIC E1 F cards Table 112 Interface attributes of the FIC E1 and FIC E1 F cards Description Attribute FIC 1E1 FIC 1E1 F FIC 2E1 FIC 2E1 F FIC 4E1 FIC 4E1 F Connector DB 15 DB 15 DB 25 Number of 1 2 1 connectors Interface G 703 G 704 standard Interface rate 2 048 Mbps Cable type E1 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial cable E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable 120 ohm 4E1 adapter cable FIC 4E1 FIC 4E1 F 75 ohm 4E1 adapter cable FIC 4E1 FIC 4E1 F Coaxial connector network connector 75 to 120 ohm adapter with BNC connector Operatingmode E1 CE1 ISDN PRI only supported by the FIC E1 cards FE1 only supported by the FIC E1 F cards Supported Backup service 2 Leased line ISDN PRI only supported by the FIC E1 cards The following figure illustrates the FIC 1E1 panel Figure 194 FIC 1E1 panel D LINK O ATO AE LAN HU YH I OO T T w izi TO The following figure illustrates the FIC 2E1 panel FIC 1E1 FIC 2E1 FIC 4E1 and FIC 1E1 F FIC 2E1 F FIC 4E1 F 163 Figure 195 FIC 2E1 panel G 21 y
48. To connect the module to a TE device use a crossover S T interface cable Connect the RJ 45 plug at one end of the cable to the FIC 2BSV FIC 4BSV interface the RJ 45 receptacle to a straight through S T interface cable and then the straight through cable to the TE device The 24 port voice subscriber circuit interface card FIC 24FXS processes and transmits voice signals over data communications networks for 24 regular analog phones faxes or ATO loop trunks of telephone exchanges It occupies two FIC slots Table 167 Interface attributes of the FIC 24FXS card Attribute Description Connector 50 pin D type female connector Interface standard FXS interface Interface rate 24 x FXS interface rate FIC 24FXS has two kinds of LEDs Active and Link Table 168 Description of LEDs on the FIC 24FXS panel LED Description Active OFF means all links are idle Blinking means one or more links are occupied Link Steady ON means no fault occurs on the link The following figure illustrates the FIC 24FXS panel Figure 276 FIC 24FXS front panel Interface Cable Connecting the Interface Cable FIC 24FXS 225 FIC 24FXS uses a 5 m 16 4 ft or 15 m 49 2 ft telephone conversion cable At one end of the cable is a D50 male connector that is used to connect to the FIC 24FXS card at the other end are 24 RJ11 connectors Figure 277 FIC 24FXS conversion cable Juua oM Ty g Thon ih tug You can connect the RJ11 conne
49. V24 DTE cable B uuuuuuuu B X2 a V 24 DCE cable Figure 182 V 24 DCE cable B g Pos 5 W z El Pos 28 y2 x1 m V 35 DTE cable Figure 183 V 35 DTE cable B 920 MTH w o a ges a e ata 00a 9000 Ss oo On Ooo m V 35 DCE cable Figure 184 V 35 DCE cable B A Pos 28 M oo oo ay aj W 685 A 02s M aB Sogo 6802 of a 0505 Pos 1 S 9696 XI 00O X2 EAZ ZESweormno apz vzzo B2Q lt cvam gt BME a X 21 DTE cable 158 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Figure 185 X 21 DTE cable x2 m X 21 DCE cable Figure 186 X 21 DCE cable m RS449 DTE cable Figure 187 RS449 DTE cable m RS449 DCE cable Figure 188 RS449 DCE cable A Pos 2 amp
50. act SIC Green Yellow GE FE Green Yellow GE Fault n 1GEC fly Ln The following table describes the electrical interface LEDs on the left of the SIC 1GEC panel Table 18 LEDs for the electrical interface on the left of the SIC 1GEC panel LED Description LINK ON means carrier signal is received OFF means no carrier signal is received Green Data is being received and transmitted at a speed of 1000 Mbps Yellow Data is being received and transmitted at a speed of 100 10 Mbps ACT OFF No data is being received and transmitted Blinking Data is being received and transmitted Table 19 LEDs for the fiber interface on the right of the SIC 1GEC panel LED Description LINK ON means carrier signal is received OFF means no carrier signal is received Green Data is being received and transmitted at a speed of 1000 Mbps Yellow Fault ACT OFF No data is being received and transmitted Blinking Data is being received and transmitted Normally category 5 twisted pair cable is adopted to connect the 10BASE T 100BASE TX Ethernet interface to the Ethernet as shown in the following figure 44 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS Connecting the Interface Cable AN Figure 38 Ethernet cable RJ45 RJ45 oe Ethernet cables fall into two categories straight through cables and crossover cables specifically 8
51. and blinking means data is being transmitted and or received Ethernet cable As shown in the following figure the Ethernet cables for FIC FE cards are category 5 twisted pairs with RJ 45 connectors Pins 1 and 2 of the interface are used for transmitting data and pins 3 and 6 are used for receiving data Connecting the Interface Cable N FIC 1GBE FIC 2GBE 149 Figure 171 Ethernet cable RJ 45 RJ 45 Making Ethernet cables You can use category 5 twisted pair cables to make Ethernet cables A category 5 twisted pair cable is composed of eight wires that are identified and grouped by colors of the outer insulator Usually a solid color wire and a white solid color wire are organized in pairs But sometimes wires are also paired by color dots Ethernet cables fit into two categories straight through and crossover a Straight through cable The wires are crimped in the RJ 45 connectors at both ends in the same order The cable is used for connecting a terminal device for example PC or router to a HUB or LAN switch The cables delivered with the router are straight through cables a Crossover cable The wires are crimped in the RJ 45 connectors at both ends in different orders The cable is used for connecting two terminal devices for example PC and router You can make cables as needed In making network cables shielded cables are preferred for electromagnetic compatibility sake The interface cables in the standar
52. and received ACT Steady yellow A 100 Mbps link is present but no data is being transmitted and received Blinking yellow A 100 Mbps link is present and data is being transmitted and received ACT Table 89 Description of the DMIM 24FSW DMIM 24FSW PoE fiber interface LEDs LED status Description OFF No link is present Steady green A link is present but no data is being transmitted and received 130 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES gt Interface Cable Connecting the Interface Optic Fiber A Table 89 Description of the DMIM 24FSW DMIM 24FSW PoE fiber interface LEDs LED status Description Blinking green A link is present and data is being transmitted and received ACT Steady yellow Error prompt In addition there is a POE LED on each board which is provided for the corresponding boards MIM 16FSW PoE and DMIM 24FSW PoE with the PoE function a The MIM 16FSW interface module is 1U in height occupying two slots a The two GE interfaces on the DMIM 24FSW PoE do not support the PoE function Normally category 5 twisted pair cable is adopted to connect the 10BASE T 100BASE TX Ethernet interface to the Ethernet as shown in the following figure Figure 147 Ethernet cable RD R45 8 8 1 1 Ethernet cables fall into two categories straight through cables and crossover cables specifically m Straight through cable The sequences of the twisted pairs crimped by RJ
53. bps 115 2k Service supported 1 Dialup through modem 2 Backup 3 Terminal access service 4 Asynchronous leased line The following figures show the FIC 8ASE and FIC 16ASE panels Figure 191 FIC 8ASE panel D h dh dh dh fb dh dh dd C 8 18 O C ASE Seager ari y gu ae ma eS O 8O oi 30 O2400 O83110 O4120 OS13O OSMO 07150 jesd c TT The FIC 8ASE FIC 16ASE has one LED for each port These LEDs are located in the apertures beneath the ports ON means a link is present OFF means data is being transmitted and or received The FIC 8ASE FIC 16ASE uses two types of interface cables AUX cable and dumb terminal cable RJ 45 to RJ 45 which can be made on site with network cables A Connecting the Interface Cable N FIC 1E1 FIC 2E1 FIC 4E1 and FIC 1E1 F FIC 2E1 F FIC 4E1 F 161 CAUTION AUX cables are optional and are provided only when ordered As for dumb terminal cables you can make on site by reference to Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual CAUTION Do not plug or unplug interface cables into or from the FIC SASE FIC 16ASE card to prevent the device or ports from being impaired Before you connect a port read its label carefully a wrong connection can c
54. cable to the Router and the other end to the peer device a AUX cable Connect the DB 25 DB 9 connector to the network device usually a modem MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F Modules 81 a Dumb terminal cable Connect the RJ 45 connector female to a standard network cable and then to a dumb terminal adapter Figure 88 Connecting MIM 8ASE MIM 16ASE cable to a dumb terminal 8ASE 16ASE dumb terminal cable Standard Dumb terminal adapter network cable Dumb adapter Step 3 Check the behavior of the LINK LED on the MIM 8ASE MIM 16ASE panel It is OFF when fault has occurred on the link and signal is out of synchronization In this case please check the link MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 Ml M 4E1 MIM 1E1 F MI M 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F Modules Introduction Interface Attributes MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 the 1 2 4 port channelized E1 PRI interface module transmits receives and processes E1 data traffic In addition you can use the card for other purposes such as CE1 access and the ISDN PRI function MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F The MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F module is different from the MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 module in the sense that a The FE1 operating mode supported by the E1 F cards allows only one n x 64 kbps bundle to be formed on each interface where n 1 to 31 However an E1 card allows arbitrary grouping of 31 channels and multiple bundles a The E1 F modules d
55. confirm the line properties There are ten cable options depending on different line properties a V 24 RS232 DTE cable DB 25 male connector at the network end mw V 24 RS232 DCE cable DB 25 female connector at the network end a V 35 DTE cable 34PIN male connector at the network end a V 35 DCE cable 34PIN female connector at the network end a X 21 DTE cable DB 15 male connector at the network end mw X 21 DCE cable DB 15 female connector at the network end 76 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES RS449 DTE cable DB 37 male connector at the network end RS449 DCE cable DB 37 female connector at the network end RS530 DTE cable DB 25 male connector at the network end RS530 DCE cable DB 25 female connector at the network end At one end of these cables is a DB 28 connector and at the other end is the connector that varies with the port at the network side a V 24 DTE cable Figure 76 V 24 DTE cable Pos Pos 28 X2 a V 24 DCE cable Figure 77 V 24 DCE cable a V 35 DTE cable Figure 78 V 35 DTE cable E KN il lew azezer Z I I I
56. conversion cable The two types of 8E1 conversion cables look similar Both of them have a DB 68 connector at one end for connecting the router However the 75 ohm 8E1 conversion cable contains 16 coaxial cables and the 120 ohm 8E1 conversion cable contains eight twisted pairs as shown in the following figures Figure 261 75 ohm 8E1 conversion cable Y YS x yno xt Ym Xt yo aIo so o a x x Figure 262 120 ohm 8E1 conversion cable X1 x pl xh x5 X6 UU xa Step 1 Choose a 4E1 8E1 conversion cable appropriate to the interface type of the peer device to be connected m If the interface impedance of the peer device is 75 ohm use a 75 ohm 4E1 8E1 conversion cable a f the interface impedance of the peer device is 120 ohm use a 120 ohm 4E1 8E1 conversion cable Step 2 Insert the DB 68 connector at one end of the 4E1 8E1 conversion cable to the DB 68 port on the FIC IMA 4E1 FIC IMA 8E1 card and fasten the cable retaining screws Step 3 Identify the sequence numbers of the connectors at the ot
57. crimped by RJ 45 connectors at both ends are different It is used for the connection between terminal devices e g PC and router And it can be made by the user For the pinouts of straight through Ethernet cable and crossover Ethernet cable see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual Step 1 Use a crossover cable for the connection to a PC router and straight through cable to a Hub LAN Switch Plug one end of the cable to an Ethernet port of the Router and another end to the desired peer device Step 2 Check the status of LINK LED on the FE module panel ON means the link is connected and OFF means the link is not connected In the latter case check the line CAUTION You should connect a cable to the port with the correct mark Misplugging is prone to impair the SIC MIM and even damage the Router MIM 1GBE MIM 2GBE Module Introduction 1 port 10Base T 100Base TX 1000Base T Ethernet electrical interface module MIM 1GBE and 2 port 10Base T 100Base TX 1000Base T Ethernet electrical interface module serve to complete the communication between a router and a LAN The GBE Gigabit Ethernet supports m Transmission distance up to 100 meters over the category 5 twisted pair cable 70 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES m Operating speeds of 1000 Mbps 100 Mbps and 10 Mbps as well as auto sensing a Half duplex full duplex autosensing Interface Attributes The interface attributes of MIM 1GBE M
58. dBm Receiver 30 0 dBm 28 0 dBm 34 0 dBm 34 0 dBm sensitivity Overload optical 14 0 dBm 7 0 dBm 9 0 dBm 10 0 dBm power Central 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm wavelength Max 2 km 1 2 mi 15 km 9 3 mi 40 km 24 9 mi 80 km 49 7 mi transmission segment Fiber type 62 5 125 um 9 125 um single 9 125 um single 9 125 um single multi mode mode mode mode 140 Interface Optical Fiber CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES N Interface LEDs CAUTION For a long haul fiber optic interface the transmission distance must be longer than 25 km 15 5 in to allow the receiver to work In case of closer distances insert an optical attenuator to reduce the input optical power The following figures illustrate the MIM 1CPOS E and MIM 1CPOS T panels Figure 159 MIM 1CPOS E front panel o000000000 mw m 0000000000 OLIK geposge O ATIVE IEPES f ON ERER EP 455M E away iy ofi Figure 160 MIM 1CPOS T front panel 20009500000 m m 0000060000 z LINK qera O ACTIVE IEPOS T ft ED AGEM The following table describes the LEDs on the MIM 1CPOS E MIM 1CPOS T panel Table 97 LEDs on the MIM 1CPOS E MIM 1CPOS T panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received blinking means data is being received or transmitted T
59. device directly if the resistance of the port to be connected is 120 ohm and there is no need to extend the cable m A network interface connector and then the peer device using another E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable if the resistance of the port to be connected is 120 ohm and there is a need to extend the cable as illustrated in the following figure Figure 136 Extending E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable DB 15 RJ 45 RJ 45 Voice Router N y Device 120 ohm balanced Network interface 120 ohm E1 twisted pair cable connector trunk cable m The peer device using a 75ohm to 120ohm adapter if the resistance of the peer device is 75 ohm Step 3 Check the behavior of the LINK LED on the MIM 2VE1 panel It is OFF when fault has occurred on the link In this case please check the link MIM 2VT1 Module Introduction gt Interface Attributes 2 port T1 voice interface module MIM 2VT1 can handle dense voice signals in VoIP system It provides two CT1 PRI ports allowing the access of 48 channels of voice signals a VCPM is provided to users together with MIM 2VT1 Users can select VPM module as needed a VPM module is installed on the main board of MIM 2VT1 The interface attributes of MIM 2VT1 are given in the following table Table 80 Interface attributes of MIM 2VT1 Attribute Description Connector RJ45 Number of conne
60. hereafter as mother board Suppose the mother board is uninstalled and put on the workbench Removing SNDE card Follow these steps to remove the SNDE card Step 1 Remove the fastening screws on the SNDE card Step 2 Remove the SNDE card from the mother board Do not overexert when removing the SNDE card because the connector of the daughter board is still on the mother board Step 3 If no SNDE card is to be installed for an MSCA card remove the four screws fastening the metal standoff on the daughter board and take the four metal standoffs For other mother boards remove the four metal standoffs Installing SNDE card Follow these steps to install SNDE card Step 1 Confirm the correct position of the SNDE card on the Step 2 For MSCA card fasten the four metal standoffs which fasten and support SNDE card For other mother boards fasten the four metal standoffs on the mother board Step 3 Install the SNDE card on the mother board and fasten it with four screws During installation align the two connectors under the daughter board to the connectors on the main board to avoid damage to the connectors CAUTION You should connect a cable to the port with the correct mark Misplugging is prone to impair the interface module and even damage the router VCPM Module Introduction VCPM voice co processing module provides transmission channel between DSP strip and system memory for voice data thus implementing TDM HW exchang
61. in slot 2 or slot 4 1 port 10Base T 100Base TX Ethernet interface card SIC 1FEA in which FE stands for Fast Ethernet and A is used to differentiate SIC 1FEA from the 1FE module SIC 1FEA is used to implement the communication between Routers and LANs It supports a Effective transmission distance of 100 meters with category 5 twisted pair cables a Operating speeds of both 100 Mbps and 10 Mbps and autosensing m Both full duplex in common use and half duplex operating modes For H3C MSR 20 40 and MSR 30 50 series routers a SIC 1FEA interface card can only be installed in SLOT2 or SLOT4 The interface attributes of SIC 1FEA are given in the following table Table 1 Interface attributes of SIC 1FEA Attribute SIC 1FEA Connector type RJ 45 Interface type MDI Number of connectors 1 Cable type Straight through Ethernet cable 22 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS gt Interface LEDs Interface Cable Table 1 Interface attributes of SIC 1FEA Attribute SIC 1FEA Operating mode 10 100 Mbps autosensing Full duplex half duplex MDI stands for Media Dependent Interface of the Ethernet Normally the interfaces on the network cards belong to this type MDIX stands for Cross Media Dependent Interface which is usually adopted on HUBs or LAN Switches SIC 1FEA panel is shown in the following figure Figure 5 SIC 1FEA panel Bele m O Se 5 Ow o nu BSS um mwg i7
62. is being transmitted or received Blinking means there is data being transmitted or received FIC 1VE1 interface cables are G 703 compliant 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cables At one end of the cable is a DB 15 male connector for the connection to the Router and at the other end is an RJ 45 connector for the connection to the network Figure 251 E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable o gE hi ji T g gju u uu u g If the cable with the resistance of 75 ohm is needed a 75 ohm to 120 ohm cable adapter one end is BNC connector and the other end is RJ 45 connector which is illustrated in the following figure can be installed Figure 252 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter with BNC connector SIN j X PN CAUTION a For the convenience of extending the connection of E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable you can use network interface connector m 7 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable network interface connector 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter are optional accessories Please select one when purchasing a FIC 1VE1 module by default they are not provided 206 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Connecting the Interface Cable N CAUTION m Some measures are taken to protect FIC 1VE1 module Still you are recommended to install a special lightning arrester at the input end of its c
63. is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received blinking means data is being received or and transmitted External ports provided by MIM 1AE3 are two SMB sockets respectively functioning as Tx end and Rx end for transmitting data and receiving data The ports work in 75 ohm unbalanced transmission mode and are connected to the peer device using a pair of 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial cables Several cable length options are available Figure 121 E3 T3 cable 7 connector B connector MIM 1AE3 and MIM 1AT3 modules use the same type of cables for connection which are called E3 T3 cables in this manual CAUTION Some measures have been taken to protect MIM 1AE3 module To achieve better lightning protection effects however you are recommended to add a special lightning arrester at the input end of the E3 T3 cable when leading it to the outdoors Step 1 Connect the SMB connector of an E3 T3 cable to the Tx port on MIM 1AE3 and another end to the Rx port on the device to be connected MIM 1AT3 Module 109 Step 2 Connect the SMB connector of another E3 T3 cable to the Rx port of MIM 1AE3 module and another end to the Tx port on the device to be connected Step 3 Check the behavior of the LINK LED on the MIM 1AE3 panel It is OFF when fault has occurred on the link and signal is out of synchronization In this case please check the link MIM 1AT3 Module Introduction b gt Int
64. lower slot 10BASE T 100BASE TX and gigabit Ethernet interfaces are connected to Ethernet networks with Ethernet cables usually category 5 twisted pair cables Figure 167 shows the appearance of an Ethernet cable Connecting an Interface Cable 1 XMIM 16FSW XMIM 24FSW 145 Figure 167 Ethernet cable hudo R5 8 H Ethernet cables fall into standard straight through cables and crossover cables m Standard cable The sequences of colored wires at the two RJ45 connectors crimped to the twisted pair cable are completely the same Standard cables are used to connect terminal devices such as PC and router to hubs or LAN Switches a Crossover cable The sequences of colored wires at the two RJ45 connectors crimped to the twisted pair cable are different Crossover cables are used to connect terminal devices such as PC and router to terminal devices For the connection identification and preparation of these two types of cables refer Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual Follow the steps below to connect an interface cable If you want to connect the router to a PC or another router use a crossover cable If you want to connect the router to a hub or LAN Switch use a straight through cable Connect one end to an Ethernet interface of the router and the other end to the PC the other router the hub or the LAN switch Check the status of the LEDs o
65. remove slot command otherwise unknown errors might occur When you replace the removed FICs you do not need to execute the undo remove slot command however If you execute the remove slot command inadvertently you can cancel that operation by using the undo remove slot command Tools required a ESD preventive wrist strap Removing a FIC Step 1 Place the router with the front panel forward Step 2 Remove the cables connected to the FIC Step 3 Loosen the captive screws at both sides of the FIC Step 4 Push the ejector levers at both sides of the FIC outward pull the FIC out of the slot along the guides until disengaging it totally from the slot Installing a FIC Step 1 Place the router with the front panel forward Step 2 Align the remote edge of the FIC with the slot edge push it into the slot push the ejector levers inward until it presses against the FIC panel the angles thus formed between the FIC panel and the levers are the minimum angles Step 3 Fix the FIC in the chassis by fastening the captive screws Repeat these steps to install all the other FICs Troubleshooting H3C Series Routers provide LEDs thus facilitating you to make sure whether a SIC MIM FIC is properly installed by viewing their state as follows After the installation of a SIC MIM FIC turn on the power and view the corresponding LEDs on the cover of the Router chassis ON means that the SIC MIM FIC is operating normally and OFF means
66. set matched resistance for an ISDN BRI S T interface the 4BS uses jumpers while the MIM 4BSE uses DIP switches The MIM 4BSE can work in dial mode or leased line mode The following table describes the interface attributes of the MIM 4BSE Table 60 Interface attributes of the MIM 4BSE Attribute Description Connector RJ 45 Number of connectors 4 Cable ISDN S T cable Protocol amp standard ITU T 1 430 O 921 O 931 Operating mode ISDN dial up ISDN leased line MIM 4BSE Module 101 Table 60 Interface attributes of the MIM 4BSE Attribute Description Supported service ISDN ISDN supplementary services Multi user number Sub addressing Backup Jumper Settings The MIM 4BSE uses jumpers to set matched resistance for ISDN BRI S T interfaces The use of 100 ohm resistance on an ISDN BRI S T interface depends on jumper settings The following figure shows the jumper settings where all the ISDN BRI S T interfaces are using 100 ohm resistance Figure 113 Jumper settings of the MIM 4BSE example St jee e S4 leee 55 eee S7 eee s2 Gee s3 eoe sc eee ss jeee 0 1 2 3 The following table describes how to set jumpers 102 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES Table 61 Set the jumpers on the MIM 4BSE Jumper settings amp description Default Interface S2 0 S1 To use a 100 ohm matched resistance for
67. the DB 15 connector and network end with the RJ 45 connector A network interface connector is available for extending the E1 cable Both ends of the connector are RJ 45 jacks that can be used to connect two 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cables In addition a 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter is available For the pinouts of E1 cables see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual CAUTION E1 cable coaxial connector network interface connector and 75ohm to 1200ohm adapter are optional Please order them together with SIC 1EPRI SIC 1E1 F By default they are not supplied CAUTION When using E1 cable outdoors you are recommended to install a special lightning arrester on the input end of the cable in order to avoid lightning more effectively 32 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS If the SIC has been properly installed follow these steps to connect the cable Step 1 Check the type of E1 cable and correctly set the DIP switch the ex factory setting of E1 CE1 PRI interface impedance is 75 ohm Step 2 Connect the DB 15 connector of E1 cable to SIC 1EPRI SIC 1E1 F Step 3 Connect the other end of the E1 cable to the corresponding network device When the E1 cable is a 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial cable m Directly connect the BNC connector of the cable to the remote equipment if there is no need for extension or Connect the BNC connector of the cable to the coaxial connector and the other end of the coaxial connector
68. the DB 15 connector of the E1 cable into the E1 FE1 port on the module Step 3 Connect the other end of the E1 cable to the network device When using 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial cable m Connect its BNC connector to the device to be connected directly if cable extension is not needed a Connect its BNC connector to a coaxial connector and the other end of the coaxial connector to the device to be connected through a 75 ohm E1 trunk cable if cable extension is needed CAUTION Connect the local Tx wire in the E1 cable to the remote Rx wire and the local Rx wire to the remote Tx wire Figure 97 Extending an E1 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial cable B 15 NC BNC Network Router N devices O 5 such as DDN Coaxial connector 75 ohm E1 trunk cable 75 ohm non balanced coaxial cable m f the port on the network device to be connected has a 120 ohm port use a 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter or use a 120 ohm cable instead 2 When using a 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable 88 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES m Connect its RJ 45 connector to the RJ 45 port on the device to be connected directly if cable extension is not needed m Connect its RJ 45 connector to a network interface connector and then the other end of the network interface connector to the network device to be connected through a 120 ohm E1 trunk cable if cable extension is needed Figure 98 Ext
69. the MIM 8E1 F Description MIM 8E1 MIM 8E1 F module MIM 8E1 MIM 8E1 F module Attribute 75 ohm 120 ohm Connector DB 68 Number of 1 connectors Interface standard G 703 Interface rate 2 048 Mbps Cable type 75 ohm 8E1 conversion cable 120 ohm 8E1 conversion cable Cable characteristic 75 ohm 120 ohm impedance Operating mode E1 CE1 ISDN PRI only supported by MIM 8E1 FE1 only supported by MIM 8E1 F Supported service 1 Backup 2 Terminal access service 3 ISDN PRI only supported by MIM 8E1 MIM 8E1 and MIM 8E1 F panels are similar The following figures illustrate MIM 8E1 panels 90 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES Interface Cable Figure 99 MIM 8E1 120 ohm panel 0000009000000000000000000 uNOOOO a OO O Onc 8E1120 ACT O O O O SS o O O Oact 8E1120 ft fi n_4 r EdicE PRD A 4 5 A Figure 100 MIM 8E1 75 ohm panel 202a00900089060090098000900000 VA LINKO OOO a O O O OLINK ais A T OOOO q J OOOOAT gg a 0000000000000000000000000000000000 t A 01 2 A E1icE1 PRI 4 5 The following table describes the LEDs on the MIM 8E1 MIM 8E1 F panel Table 51 Description of the LEDs on the MIM 8E1 MIM 8E1 F panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON m
70. the link is not connected In the latter case check the line SIC 1TPRI SIC 1T1 F Introduction Interface Attributes 1 port channelized T1 CT1 PRI compatible interface card SIC 1TPRI supports Transmission Receiving and handling of T1 data streams CT1 channel T1 access ISDN PRI function Remote loopback and local loopback facilitating the effective and flexible debugging It is possible to use the card for multiple purposes through different configurations Following are the differences between SIC 1TPRI and 1 port Fractional T1 interface card SIC 1T1 F FT1 mode of SIC 1T1 F can support only one channel bundle the rate is n x 56 kbps n 1 24 while the 24 channels can be grouped into multiple arbitrary bundles by SIC 1TPRI SIC 1T1 F does not support PRI mode The interface attributes of SIC 1TPRI SIC 1T1 F are given in the following table Table 8 Interface attributes of SIC 1TPRI SIC 1T1 F Attribute Description Connector type RJ 45 Number of connectors 1 34 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS Interface LEDs Table 8 Interface attributes of SIC 1TPRI SIC 1T1 F Attribute Description Interface standard G 703 T1 102 G 704 Interface rate Cable type Operating mode Supported service AT amp T TR 54016 AT amp T TR 62411 ANSI T1 403 1 544 Mbps T1 cable 100 ohm standard shielded network cable CT1 ISDN PRI supported by SIC 1TPRI only FT1 supported by SIC 1T1 F only Bac
71. to the FIC 2BSV FIC 4BSV where the traffic is decompressed and sent to the TE device a When a BSV interface works in user mode traffic is processed as follows The digital voice traffic received from the B channels on the BSV interface is decompressed and forwarded through the CPU on the main control board to a local FXS or FXO analog voice interface The voice signals received on the local FXS or FXO analog voice interface are processed by VolP and forwarded through the CPU on the main control board to the FIC 2BSV FIC 4BSV where the traffic is compressed and sent out of the BSV interface to the ISDN switch a In conjunction with FXS or FXO analog voice interface modules the card provides flexibility in voice call routing 222 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Interface Attributes Interface LEDs m The signaling on the ISDN BRI D channel is processed separately by CPU m The BSV interfaces support remote power supply and can be connected to ISDN phones directly m The FIC 2BSV FIC 4BSV is dedicated to voice applications which is different from the BS interface cards where BRI data applications are supported The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC 2BSV FIC 4BSV Table 165 Interface attributes of the FIC 2BSV FIC 4BSV Attribute FIC 2BSV FIC 4BSV Connector RJ 45 Number of connectors 2 Interface standard ITU T 1 430 Q 921 Q 931 Interface rate 192 Kbps Cable ISDN S i
72. traffic providing E3 traffic access m In CE3 mode providing the subscribers with N x 64 kbps low speed access where N is smaller than or equal to 128 a 3 represents the tertiary group rate of E system in the TDM system that is 34 368 Mbps Through E23 and E12 demultiplexing an E3 channel can be channelized into 16 E1 lines each supporting both the E1 and CE1 modes 23 means either E2 to E3 multiplex or E3 to E2 demultiplex and E12 means E1 to E2 multiplex or E2 to E1 demultiplex E23 and E12 discussed here represent the demultiplex process The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC 1CE3 FIC 2CE3 Table 122 FIC 1CE3 interface attributes Attribute Description Connector SMB Number of connectors 2 Interface standard G 703 G 704 G 751 Interface rate 34 368 Mbps Cable type E3 cable 75 ohm coaxial cable Interface LEDs Interface Cable Connecting the Interface Cable A FIC 1CE3 179 Table 122 FIC 1CE3 interface attributes Attribute Description Operating mode E3 CE3 Supported service E3 leased line The following figure illustrates an FIC 1CE3 panel Figure 221 FIC 1CE3 panel The following table describes the LEDs on the card panel Table 123 LEDs on the FIC 1CE3 panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received on the inter
73. which can connect one 4 wire telephone cables Figure 268 type cable m When using Y cable connect the X1 end of the cable to the interface on FIC 1SHL 4W and connect the other two ends to DSLAM through PSTN nye m When using cable connect one end of the cable to the interface on FIC 1SHL 4W and the other end to DSLAM through PSTN FIC 1CPOS Introduction The 1 port channelized SDH SONET interface card FIC 1CPOS provides one STM 1 OC3 compliant multi channel interface and supports communication speeds up to 155 52 Mbps Interface Attributes AN Interface LEDs FIC 1CPOS 219 The FIC 1CPOS has two models the FIC 1CPOS E for E1 system and the FIC 1CPOS T for T1 system The FIC 1CPOS communicates with the CPU through the PCI interface to receive and transmit data on the STM 1 channelized POS interface It supports m Four types of hot swappable SFP optical interface modules for your choice multi mode short haul 1310 nm single mode medium haul 1310 nm single mode long haul 1310 nm and single mode ultra long haul 1550 nm a Clear channel unframed E1 or T1 a Fractional framed E1 or T1 m Up to 256 64 kbps logical channels The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC 1 CPOS E FIC 1 CPOS T Table 163 Interface attributes of the FIC 1C
74. 1 F are similar The following figure illustrates an MIM 2E1 panel Figure 90 MIM 2E1 panel MIM 4E1 and MIM 4E1 F panels are similar The following figure illustrates an MIM 4E1 module Figure 91 MIM 4E1 panel 0 1l cE1 PRI 2 3 The following table describes the LEDs on MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 and MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F panels Interface Cable MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F Modules 83 Table 47 Description of the LEDs on MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 and MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F panels LED Description LINK ON means the carrier signal has been received OFF means no carrier signal has been received ACTIVE OFF means no data is being transmitted or received ON means data is being transmitted or received Interface cable of MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 and MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F modules MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 and MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F interface cables are G 703 compliant cables referred to as E1 cables throughout the rest part of the manual E1 cables are divided into two types 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial cables and 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cables a 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial cable Figure 92 E1 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial cable You can select a pair of coaxial connectors with a BNC receptacle at both ends that connect two 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial cables with BNC connectors The coaxial connectors are used for the extension connection with E1 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial cable a 120 ohm ba
75. 125 um 9 125 um single 9 125 um single 9 125 um single multi mode mode mode mode Max 2 km 1 2 mi 15 km 9 32 mi 40 km 24 86 mi 80 km 49 71 mi transmission segment The following figure illustrates the MIM 1POS panel Figure 123 MIM 1POS panel LINK pos O ACTIVE FD 4ELM POS an The following table describes the LEDs on the MIM 1POS panel Table 72 Description of the LEDs on the MIM 1POS panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received blinking means data is being received or and transmitted Same as the MIM 1CPOS the MIM 1POS uses LC fiber optic connectors and must be connected using fiber optic with an LC connector Step 1 Insert the SFP module into its corresponding slot Step 2 Locate the Rx and Tx fiber optic interfaces on the module Use two fibers to connect the MIM 1POS to another device with Rx to Tx and Tx to Rx 112 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES N Step 3 Check the LINK LED on the MIM 1POS panel ON means the Rx link is present and OFF means the opposite Check the line in the second case WARNING Because invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture of an optical port when no fiber is connected or the dust cap is removed do not stare into the open aperture Replace the dus
76. 138 T1 cable RJ45 RJ45 CH For the pinouts of T1 cables see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual 8 CAUTION The corresponding cables are not included in the standard shipment package of MIM 2VT1 Please order them together with MIM 2VT1 By default they are not supplied CAUTION a You should connect a cable to the port with the correct mark Misplugging is prone to impair the card and even damage the router m When using T1 cable outdoors you are recommended to install a special lightning arrester on the input end of the cable in order to avoid lightning more effectively If the MIM has been properly installed follow these steps to connect the cable Step 1 Plug one end of T1 cable into the RJ45 connector of MIM 2VT1 Step 2 Connect the other end of T1 cable to the peer device Step 3 Check the status of LINK LED on the MIM 2VT1 panel OFF means the link is not connected In the latter case check the line MIM 1VE1 Module Introduction gt Interface Attributes 1 port E1 voice interface module MIM 1VE1 can handle dense voice signals in VoIP system It provides a CE1 PRI R2 port allowing the access of 30 channels of voice signals a VCPM is provided to users together with MIM 1VE1 Users can select VPM module as needed a VPM module is installed on the main board of MIM 1VE1 The interface attributes of MIM 1VE1 are given in th
77. 16 kbps Interface cable Tailor made 4 wire telephone cable Supported services G SHDSL access over ordinary telephone lines Interface LEDs The following figure illustrates the MIM 1SHL 4W panel Figure 162 MIM 1SHL 4W panel UO 00000 O7 O LINK O O O isHaw O AGT O O O ISHLAN 600 0m BISISIDIDIRID 00a GAG The following table describes the LEDs on the MIM 1SHL 4W panel Table 99 LEDs on the MIM 1SHL 4W panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received Blinking means data is being received or transmitted a Interface Cable MIM 1SHL 4W uses a tailor made 4 wire telephone cable of type Y or I You can select the type as needed a As shown in the following figure on one end of the type Y G SHDSL cable there is one RJ 11 connector X1 which is used to connect the MIM 1SHL AW module on the other end there are two RJ 11 connectors X2 and X3 which can connect two 2 wire telephone lines Pins 3 and 4 of X1 are connected with pins 3 and 4 of X2 and pins 2 and 5 of X1 are connected with pins 3 and 4 of X3 Connecting the Interface Cable XMIM 16FSW XMI
78. 1BU y V y y y y y SIC 2BU x y x V y y y SIC 1BSV y y y y y y y SIC 2BSV x y x y y y y SIC 1FEF y y y y y y y SIC 1FEA y y V y y y y SIC 1SAE y y y y y y y SIC 1E1 F y y y y y y y SIC 1T1 F y y V y y y y SIC EPRI y y y y y y y SIC TPRI y y V y y y y SIC 1FXS y y y y y y y SIC 2FXS V y y y y y y SIC 1FXO y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y y 236 CHAPTER A INTERFACE CARD AND INTERFACE MODULE PURCHASE GUIDE Interface card type Table 177 SIC DSIC options 20 20 20 21 20 40 30 11 30 16 30 20 20 40 30 60 50 40 50 60 SIC 1 ADSL SIC 1AM SIC 2AM J Ni x V Ni Ni V Ni Ni V Ni Ni MIM DMIM Purchase Guide Interface card type 20 20 20 21 Table 178 MIM DMIM options 20 40 30 11 30 16 30 20 20 40 30 60 50 40 50 60 MIM 1VE1 MIM 1VT1 MIM 2VE1 MIM 2VT1 MIM 16FSW DMIM 24FSW MIM OAP MIM OAP A MIM ASM MIM OAP B MIM 16FSW POE DMIM 24FSW POE MIM 1FE MIM 2FE NS MIM 4FE MIM 1GBE MIM 2GBE MIM 1GEF MIM 2GEF MIM 2SAE MIM 4SAE MIM 8SAE MIM 8ASE MIM 16ASE MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 MIM 8E1 120 MIM 8E1 75 MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F MIM 8E1 120 F x x x x x x lt lt lt 2 2 lt lt lt 2 2 X lt lt lt eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee LA lt lt lt 2 2 lt lt lt 2 X lt lt lt eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee Aa X lt lt lt 2 2 lt lt lt e X ED DG BO a oO ON Bn OX lt lt lt eee e
79. 2FE FIC 4FE interface attributes Description Attribute FIC 1FE FIC 2FE FIC 4FE Connector RJ 45 Number of connectors 1 2 4 Cable Straight through Ethernet cable Operating mode Full duplex half duplex 10 100 Mbps auto sensing Supported frame format Ethernet_ll Ethernet_SNAP 148 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Interface LEDs Interface Cable The following figure illustrates an FIC 1FE panel Figure 168 FIC 1FE panel Dl ww E C FE 1FE o 10Base T 100Base TX E The following figure illustrates an FIC 2FE panel Figure 169 FIC 2FE panel O 2FE 2FE RE o 10Base T 100Base TX TH The following figure illustrates an FIC 4FE panel Figure 170 FIC 4FE panel D UKO J OLINKO L OUINK C u J Li OAeTO L OACT E 1 10Base THO0Base TX 2 4 ToT TOOT IT The following table describes the LEDs on the FIC 1FE FIC 2FE FIC 4FE panel Table 103 LEDs on the FIC 1FE FIC 2FE FIC 4FE panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACTIVE OFF means no data is being transmitted or received on the interface
80. 45 connectors at both ends are the same It is used for the connection between a terminal device e g PC and router and a Hub LAN Switch The cables delivered with the Router are straight through cables Crossover cable The sequences of the twisted pairs crimped by RJ 45 connectors at both ends are different It is used for the connection between terminal devices e g PC and router And it can be made by the user For the pinouts of straight through Ethernet cable and crossover Ethernet cable see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual Connecting Ethernet fiber interface cable CAUTION When connecting the optical fiber observe the following a Do not over bend the optical fiber Its curvature radius must be no less than 10 cm 3 9 in a Ensure that the Tx and Rx ends are correctly connected a Ensure that the fiber ends are clean AN MIM IMA 4E1 MIM IMA 8E1 Module 131 WARNING Laser danger Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the fiber optic ports which are connected to lasers To protect your eyes against radiation harm never stare into an open fiber optic port Step 1 Insert the SFP optical module into its corresponding slot Step 2 Locate the Rx and Tx ports of the GE interface Connect them to another device with two optical fibers Rx to Tx and Tx to Rx Step 3 Check the status of LINK LED on the GE port ON means the link is connected and OFF means the link is not connected In the latte
81. 50 series routers a SIC 1GEC interface card can only be installed in SLOT2 or SLOTA The attributes of SIC 1GEC interface are shown in the following table Table 16 Interface Attributes of the SIC 1GEC Attribute Description Connector RJ 45 Interface type MDI Frame format Ethernet_ll Ethernet_SNAP IEEE 802 2 IEEE 802 3 Operation mode 10 100 1000 Mbps autosensing Full half duplex Network protocol IP Novell IPX Table 17 Attributes of SFP module Maximum SFP module Fiber transmission name Wavelength Connector specification distance 1000BASE SX SF 850 nm LC 50 125 um 550 m 1804 5 ft P multi mode fiber 62 5 125 um 275 m 902 2 ft multi mode fiber 1000BASE LX SF 1310 nm 9 125 um 10 km 6 2 mi P single mode 1000BASE LH SF fiber 40 km 24 9 mi P 1000BASE ZX ILR 1550 nm SFP 1000BASE ZX V 70 km 43 5 mi R SFP 1000BASE ZX U R SFP 100 km 62 1 mi N Interface LEDs Interface Cable SIC 1GEC 43 CAUTION SIC 1 GEC uses COMBO interface therefore it cannot support fiber and electrical interfaces at the same time When the router is powered on the electrical interface takes effect by default If you want to use a fiber interface use a command to configure it The following figure illustrates the SIC 1GEC panel Figure 37 SIC 1GEC panel MES ale Po unk ACT
82. 75 ohm E1 trunk cable 75 ohm non balanced coaxial cable m f the to be connected network device has a 120 ohm port you need a 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter or a 120 ohm cable instead When using a 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable do the following a f no cable extension is needed directly connect the RJ 45 connector of the cable to the RJ 45 port on the device m f cable extension is needed connect the RJ 45 connector of the cable to a network interface connector and the other end of the network interface connector to the device using a 120 ohm E1 trunk cable FIC 8E1 FIC 8E1 F 169 Figure 206 Extending an E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable DB15 RJ 45 RJ 45 Network devices suc Router a as DDN Network interface connector 120 ohm balanced twisted pair 120ehm E1 trunk cable Step 4 Power on the router and check the behavior of the LINK LED on the card OFF means fault occurs on the line and the signal is not synchronized Check the line status Connecting the interface cable of the FIC 4E1 FIC 4E1 F Step 1 Select the 4E1 E1 cable appropriate to the type of the port on the to be connected device and correctly set the DIP switch m If the impedance of the to be connected port is 75 ohm select E1 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial and 75 ohm 4E1 adapter cables and set all the BITs of the DIP switch to the ON position that is the port impedance is 75 ohm m lf the impedance of the to be connected port is 120 oh
83. B 7A VB BA Vid TA V2 13A Vi4 15A of Foo deg tog Felor food too Feo Nr XMIM XMIM A A jrsw LEM Jes Jeo Jeo e e Jeo fee Jeo ga 18FSw I H 1OBASE TMC0BASE TX H TT TT Figure 166 shows the XMIM 24FSW panel Figure 166 XMIM 24FSW panel N GreensLink YallowsActive tae ev eve TA 8 _ 8 vi0 NAT dSA YI IA YIS do vi 19A vab ZIA v22 23A of borc foo foo hr Goo Soo Goo Go of boo Geof Foo it XMIM XMM arw eS oo Jeo ea e eo eo aa Ta eu eo ea aa A 24FSW iwr rar T H 10BASE THODBASE TX H ee Each 10 100 Mbps Ethernet interface on the panel has two corresponding LEDs One is yellow and the other is green Table 101 describes these LEDs Table 101 LEDs of the XMIM 16FSW XMIM 24FSW FE port LED status Green LED LINK Description ON A link is present OFF No link is present Yellow LED ACT Blinking Data is being received and sent on the port OFF No data is being received or sent on the port XMIM 16FSW and XMIM 24FSW are both 1U 44 45 mm namely 1 75 in in height and each occupy two slots the upper slot and the
84. Both of them have a DB68 connector at one end for connecting the router However the Connecting the Interface Cable MIM IMA 4E1 MIM IMA 8E1 Module 133 75 ohm 4E1 conversion cable contains eight coaxial cables and the 120 ohm 4E1 conversion cable contains four twisted pairs The MIM IMA 8E1 module provides eight E1 ports and adopts a 120 ohm or a 75 ohm 8E1 conversion cable The two types of 8E1 conversion cables look similar Both of them have a DB68 connector at one end for connecting the router However the 75 ohm 8E1 conversion cable contains 16 coaxial cables and the 120 ohm 8E1 conversion cable contains eight twisted pairs as shown in the following figures Figure 150 120 ohm 8E1 conversion cable J fe SN J i ma LJ Figure 151 yw YS YW xa XR ym XR oon mx mom Ox x Follow these steps to connect the MIM IMA 4E1 MIM IMA 8E1 interface ca
85. C 24FXS x x x x x x y DFIC 24024S x x x x x x y 1 Note that in some regions the OAP modules are sold as OSM modules They are identical in function ESM VPM VCPM Purchase Guide Table 180 ESM VPM VCPM options Interface card 20 20 20 40 50 40 type 20 21 20 40 30 11 30 16 30 20 30 60 50 60 ESM ANDE y V y y V y V ESM SNDE y y y y y y y VCPM x y x y y y y 240 CHAPTER A INTERFACE CARD AND INTERFACE MODULE PURCHASE GUIDE Table 180 ESM VPM VCPM options Interface card 20 20 20 40 50 40 type 20 21 20 40 30 11 30 16 30 20 30 60 50 60 VPM32 x y x y y y y VPM24 x y x y y y y VPM16 x y x y y y y VPM8 x V x y y y y
86. C 8T1 F panels Attribute Description Connector RJ 45 Number of connectors 1 Interface standard G 703 T1 102 G 704 AT amp T TR 54016 AT amp T TR 62411 ANSI T1 403 Interface rate 1 544 Mbps Cable type 8T1 conversion cable 100 ohm straight through shielded network cable Interface LEDs Interface Cable FIC 8T1 FIC 8T1 F 177 Table 120 LEDs on the FIC 8T1 and FIC 8T1 F panels Attribute Description Operating mode CT1 ISDN PRI only supported by the FIC 8T1 FT1 only supported by the FIC 8T1 F Supported service 1 Backup 2 Terminal access service 3 ISDN PRI supported by the FIC 8T1 FIC 8T1 and FIC 8T1 F panels look the same The following figure illustrates a FIC 8T1 panel Figure 219 FIC 8T1 panel cor I IJ ft tt t f cea Re T fg T cor O uK OOOO R OEO OOOO UK C i at 0000 g a ey P OOOO aet es 04 a8 THeTUPRI s 6 7 A CEEEEEE Fy mEn li I The following table describes the LEDs on the card panels Table 121 LEDs on FIC 8T1 and FIC 8T1 F panels LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACTIVE OFF means no data is being transmitted or received ON means data is being transmitted and or received The following figure illustrates the 8T1 conversion cable for the FIC 8T1 FIC 8T1 F card Figure 220 871 conversion cable JA acme posit PE
87. CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES gt Connecting the Interface Cable A Figure 140 E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable o g uu uu u g LJ Oy rq TL DO If the cable with the resistance of 75 ohm is needed a 75 ohm to 120 ohm cable adapter one end is BNC connector and the other end is RJ 45 connector which is illustrated in the following figure can be installed Figure 141 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter with BNC connector yfi J p a Wa For cable pinouts see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual For the convenience of extending the connection of E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable you can use network interface connector E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable network interface connector 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter are optional accessories Please select one when purchasing a MIM 1VE1 module by default they are not provided CAUTION Some measures are taken to protect MIM 1VE1 module Still you are recommended to install a special lightning arrester at the input end of its connection cable to obtain better lightning protection when the cable is led outdoors Read the mark identifying a port before you connect a cable to it making sure it is the correct port Wrong connection tends to dam
88. CT3 Supported service T3 leased line MIM 1CT3 panel is shown in the following figure Figure 112 MIM 1CT3 panel SS Te 16181018 a 101s a0 0I OIOI OLOI OLOLLO O UNKIACT C acta O PIAL 1CT3 LODO MM 2390902000020 R 0000650 ry The following table describes the LEDs on the MIM 1CT3 panel 100 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES Table 59 Description of the LEDs on the MIM 1CT3 panel LED Description Interface Cable gt LINK ACT ON means the carrier signal has been received OFF means no carrier signal has been received Blinking means data is being transmitted or and received LP AL ON means the interface is in a loopback Blinking means an AIS LFA or RAI alarm signal is present OFF means no loopback or alarm is present Note AIS Alarm indication signal LFA loss of frame alignment RAI Remote alarm indication MIM 1CT3 and MIM 1CE3 use the same type of interface cables and make connection in the same way For details see MIM 1CE3 Module on page 97 E3 T3 cables are not provided together with MIM 1CT3 and shall be prepared by the user MIM 4BSE Module Introduction Interface Attributes MIM 4BSE the four port ISDN BRI interface module transmits receives and processes four channels of ISDN BRI S T data traffic on ISDN BRI S T interfaces The MIM 4BSE differs from the 4BS only in the way they
89. E1 F panel p LES ACT ex AS Fractional E1 hE The status description of the LEDs is given in the following table Table 7 Description of the LEDs on SIC 1EPRI SIC 1E1 F panel LED Description LINK ON means carrier signal has been received OFF means no carrier signal has been received ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received blinking means data is being received or and transmitted Interface Cable AN Connecting the Interface Cable N SIC 1EPRI SIC 1E1 F 31 Interface cables for SIC 1EPRI SIC 1E1 F are standard E1 G 703 cables E1 G 703 cables have two types 75 ohm non balanced coaxial cables and 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cables shown as follows a 75 ohm non balanced coaxial cable Figure 21 E1 G 703 75 ohm non balanced coaxial cable 75 ohm non balanced coaxial cable connects SIC 1EPRI SIC 1E1 F with the DB 15 connector and the network end with the BNC connector A pair of coaxial connectors is available for extending the E1 cable Both ends of the connectors are BNC receptacles that can be used to connect two 75 ohm non balanced coaxial cables with BNC connectors a 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable Figure 22 E1 G 703 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable connects SIC 1EPRI SIC 1E1 F with
90. GEF 16 port 10 100 Mbps Layer 2 switching interface card FIC 16FSW 24 port 10 100 Mbps Layer 2 switching interface card DFIC 24FSW 16 port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Layer 2 switching PoE interface module FIC 16FSW POE 24 port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Layer 2 switching PoE interface module DFIC 24FSW POE 2 port enhanced multiprotocol synchronous asynchronous serial interface card FIC 2SAE 4 port enhanced multiprotocol synchronous asynchronous serial interface card FIC 4SAE 8 port enhanced multiprotocol synchronous asynchronous serial interface card FIC 8SAE 4 port ISDN BRI S T interface card using jumpers FIC 4BSE 8 port enhanced asynchronous serial interface card FIC 8ASE 16 port enhanced asynchronous serial interface card FIC 16ASE 1 port channelized T1 PRI interface card FIC 1T1 2 port channelized T1 PRI interface card FIC 2T1 4 port channelized T1 PRI interface card FIC 4T1 8 port channelized T1 PRI interface card FIC 8T1 1 port fractional T1 interface card FIC 1T1 F 2 port fractional T1 interface card FIC 2T1 F 14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 4 port fractional T1 interface card FIC 4T 1 F 8 port fractional T1 interface card FIC 8T1 F 1 port channelized E1 PRI interface card FIC 1E1 2 port channelized E1 PRI interface card FIC 2E1 4 port channelized E1 PRI interface card FIC 4E1 8 port channelized E1 PRI interface card FIC 8E1 1 port fractional E1 interface card FIC 1E1 F 2 port
91. HSC _ H3C MSR 20 30 50 Series Routers a3com company nterface Card and Interface Module Manual v1 00 www 3Com com Part Number 10016325 Rev AA August 2007 3Com Corporation 350 Campus Drive Marlborough MA USA 01752 3064 Copyright 2007 3Com Corporation All rights reserved No part of this documentation may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative work such as translation transformation or adaptation without written permission from 3Com Corporation 3Com Corporation reserves the right to revise this documentation and to make changes in content from time to time without obligation on the part of 3Com Corporation to provide notification of such revision or change 3Com Corporation provides this documentation without warranty term or condition of any kind either implied or expressed including but not limited to the implied warranties terms or conditions of merchantability satisfactory quality and fitness for a particular purpose 3Com may make improvements or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this documentation at any time If there is any software on removable media described in this documentation it is furnished under a license agreement included with the product as a separate document in the hard copy documentation or on the removable media in a directory file named LICENSE TXT or LICENSE TXT If you are unable to locate a copy please contact 3Com and a copy
92. IC 1CPOS T panels Table 164 LEDs on the FIC 1CPOS E FIC 1CPOS T panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received blinking means data is being received or transmitted Interface Optical Fiber The FIC 1CPOS can only be connected with an optical fiber cable with an LC type fiber optic connector Figure 271 LC type fiber optic connector i gt Fiber optic connectors according to ITU are passive components used to stably but not permanently connect two or more optical fibers They are indispensable to a fiber optic communications system in the sense that it allows add drop connections between optical channels Many types of fiber optic connectors are available such as FC round fiber optic connector with screw thread ST round plug in fiber optic connector Connecting the Interface Optical Fiber FIC 2BSV FIC 4BSV Module 221 LC square fiber optic connector MT RJ square fiber optic transceiver connector Step 1 Insert the SFP card into its corresponding slot Step 2 Locate the Rx and Tx fiber optic interfaces on the interface card Use two fibers to connect the FIC CPOS to another device Rx to Tx and Tx to Rx Step 3 Power on the device and read the state of the LINK LED for the CPOS interface ON means the Rx link is present and OFF means the opposite In the latter case check the line status WARNING Becaus
93. IM 2GBE are given in the following table Table 39 Interface attributes of MIM 1GBE MIM 2GBE Description Attribute MIM 1GBE MIM 2GBE Connector RJ 45 Number of connectors 1 2 Interface type MDI MDIX Interface standard 802 3 802 3u 802 3ab Cable type Ethernet cable Operating mode 10 100 1000 Mbps auto sensing Half duplex full duplex autosensing Interface LEDs MIM 1GBE MIM 2GBE panel is shown in the following figure Figure 67 MIM 1GBE panel o650000000 7 0650050505060 LINK 1 BeE O ACT 1GBE i IMA Rasa T j Figure 68 MIM 2GBE m im Tr E UT F a MM 9 sO ee O Lo Lo O a6BE pT i aT 4 AT The following table describes the LEDs on the MIM 1GBE MIM 2GBE panel Table 40 Description of the LEDs on the MIM 1GBE MIM 2GBE panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received blinking means data is being received or and transmitted Interface Cable MIM 1GBE MIM 2GBE uses both crossover and straight through cables for connection Connecting the Interface Cable MIM 1GEF MIM 2GEF Module 71 Figure 69 Ethernet cable RJ45 RJ45 mjg For the pinouts of Ethernet cables see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual To conne
94. IM 4E1 1200hm CAB printed on the main label for 120 ohm 4E1 conversion cables whereas the words MIM 4E1 75ohm CAB are printed on the main label for 75 ohm 4E1 conversion cables The two types of cables have a similar appearance as illustrated in the following figures However a 75 ohm 4E1 conversion cable uses 8 core coaxial cables but a 120 ohm 4E1 conversion cable uses four twisted pair cables Figure 94 120 ohm 4E1 conversion cable ce DB25 B uuuuuuuu g HUAWEI HUAWEI I Pos 15 Internal DIP Switches MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F Modules 85 Figure 95 75 ohm 4E1 conversion cable ur yn mr yn ur yn ur Jr X4 B x3 X2 x1 a4 fo Cassio a CAUTION Both 75 ohm 4E1 and 120 ohm 4E1 conversion cables are reguired for MIM 4E1 4E1 F modules While E1 cable is optional please order E1 cables when purchasing an MIM 4E1 or MIM 4E1 F module By default they are not provided In addition a 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter is provided For the pinouts of cables see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 and MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F modules provide internal DIP switches and the setting of DIP switches decides the in
95. If the line is an ISDN S T interface line directly connect the cable to the BSV interface of the SIC 1BSV SIC 2BSV interface card 2 To connect the interface card to a TE device use a crossover S T interface cable Connect the RJ 45 plug at one end of the cable to the BSV interface the RJ 45 receptacle to a straight through S T interface cable and then the straight through cable to the TE device SIC 1FEF Introduction Interface Attributes SIC 1FEF is short for 1 port 100 Mbps fiber Ethernet interface card where FE is short for Fast Ethernet and F for fiber indicating an optical fiber interface SIC 1FEF is used for the communication between the router and LAN SIC 1FEF supports a Five types of SFP removable optical interface modules multimode short haul 850 nm single mode medium haul 1310 nm single mode long haul 1310 nm single mode long haul 1550 nm and single mode ultra long haul 1550 nm a 1000 Mbps interface rate a Full duplex The following table describes the interface attributes of the SIC 1FEF Table 33 Interface attributes of SIC 1BSV SIC 2BSV Attribute Description Number of 1 connectors Connector SFP LC Interface standard 802 3 802 3u and 802 3ab Transmitt Type Multimode Single mode Long haul Long haul Ultra long ing short haul medium ha haul 1550 optical 850 nm ul 1310 1310 nm 1550 nm nm ee lt MD Opti interface Optical module mod le interfa
96. Interface standard ITU T 1 430 Q 921 Q 931 Interface rate 192 Kbps Cable ISDN S interface cable Supported service Voice access over ISDN S interface cable The following figure illustrates the SIC 1BSV panel Figure 55 SIC 1BSV panel B2 ON Z OO SIC Bi ACT 0 IBSV The following figure illustrates the SIC 2BSV panel Figure 56 SIC 2BSV panel B2 ON ON B2 Oo OO sic B1 ACT 0 ACTB1 2BSV The following table describes the LEDs on SIC 1BSV SIC 2BSV panel Table 32 LEDs on SIC 1BSV SIC 2BSV panel LED Description B1 B2 ACT ON Green Blinking indicates data is being transmitted or received on B1 channel Green Blinking indicates data is being transmitted or received on B2 channel Yellow Blinking indicates the link is being activated Steady ON indicates the link is active Green power LED Steady ON indicates the card is powered on 60 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS Interface Cable Connecting the Interface Cable AN When a BSV interface works in user mode it uses a straight through ISDN S T interface cable for connection with pins 3 and 6 for data transmission and pins 4 and 5 for data receiving At both ends of the cable are RJ 45 connectors Figure 57 Straight through ISDN S T cable Green Black d When a BSV interface works in network mode it uses a crossover ISDN S T interface cable for connection with pins 3 and 6 for data transmission and pins 4 and
97. L interface module MIM 1SHL 4W adopts trellis coded pulse amplitude modulation TCPAM coding and provides symmetric rates up to 4 624 Mbps The transmission rate of the interface can automatically adapt to line distances and conditions Compared with ADSL G SHDSL allows farther transmission distance and thus has a wider application scope It is an alternative to E1 T1 line for high speed data service access However as TCPAM uses the band starting from 0 Hz for data transmission G SHDSL cannot share the same line with POTS or ISDN like what ADSL has done The MIM 1SHL 4W delivers these features Supporting manual G SHDSL line activation deactivation and easy to use fault location tools m Supporting G 991 2 interface standard and auto sensing a Allowing you to set the dual pair G SHDSL interface to operate in dual pair or single pair mode Table 98 Interface attributes of the MIM 1SHL 4W Attribute MIM 1SHL AW Connector RJ 11 Number of connectors 1 Interface standard ITU T G991 2 ITU T G994 1 handshaking 142 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES Table 98 Interface attributes of the MIM 1SHL 4W Attribute MIM 1SHL 4W Interface rate In single pair mode supports the sending and receiving independent symmetric rates in the range from 192 kbps to 2312 kbps in steps of 8 kbps In dual pair mode supports the sending receiving independent symmetric rates in the range from 384 kbps to 4624 kbps in steps of
98. M 24FSW 143 Figure 163 Type Y cable Ke ll K3 ll m As shown in the following figure on both ends of the I type G SHDSL cable there is an RJ 11 connector The I type G SHDSL cable can connect one 4 wire telephone cable Figure 164 type cable We Li Ei Xe XI m When using the Y cable connect the X1 end of the cable to the interface on MIM 1SHL 4W and connect the other two ends X2 X3 to DSLAM through PSTN m When using the I cable connect one end of the cable to the interface on MIM 1SHL 4W and the other end to DSLAM through PSTN XMIM 16FSW XMIM 2 4FSW Introduction Interface Attributes XMIM 16FSW and XMIM 24FSW are a 16 port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Layer 2 switching MIM interface card and a 24 port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Layer 2 switching MIM interface card which can be installed on the MSR 30 11 Each XMIM 16FSW provides sixteen ordinary 10 100 Mbps RJ45 connector interfaces while each XMIM 24FSW provides twenty four 10 100 Mbps RJ45 connector interfaces Both XMIM 16FSW and XMIM 24FSW are suitable for a small enterprise network to serve as a switching amp routing device which can be directly connected to PCs and network devices of the enterprise XMIM 16FSW and XMIM 24FSW support the following functions a A transmission distance of 100 m
99. MIM 1CPOS Module Introduction MIM 1CPOS is short for the 1 port channelized SDH SONET interface module C stands for Channelized and POS for Packet over SDH SONET MIM 1CPOS provides one STM 1 OC3 compliant multi channel interface and support communication speeds up to 155 52 Mbps MIM 1CPOS has two models MIM 1CPOS E for E1 system and MIM 1CPOS T for T1 system MIM 1CPOS is inserted in a MIM slot of a modular router and communicates with the CPU through the PCI interface to receive and transmit data on STM 1 channelized POS interface It supports m Four types of hot swappable SFP optical interface modules for your choice multi mode short haul 1310 nm single mode medium haul 1310 nm single mode long haul 1310 nm and single mode ultra long haul 1550 nm m Clear channel unframed E1 or T1 m Fractional framed E1 or T1 m Up to 256 64 kbps logical channels Interface Attributes The following table describes the interface attributes of MIM 1CPOS E MIM 1CPOS T Table 96 Interface attributes of the MIM 1CPOS E MIM 1CPOS T module Attribute MIM 1CPOS E MIM 1CPOS T Connector SFP LC Number of 1 Connectors Interface SONET OC 3 SDH STM 1 standard Interface rate 155 52 Mbps Optical Type Multi mode Single mode Single mode Single mode transmitt short haul medium haul long haul ultra long haul er power Min 19 0 dBm 15 0 dBm 5 0 dBm 5 0 dBm Max 14 0 dBm 8 0 dBm 0 dBm 0
100. MIM 1SHL 4W Module 141 XMIM 16FSW XMIM 24FSW 143 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS FIC 1FE FIC 2FE FIC 4FE 147 FIC 1GBE FIC 2GBE 149 FIC 1GEF FIC 2GEF 151 FIC 2SAE FIC 4SAE FIC 8SAE 153 FIC 8ASE FIC 16ASE 159 FIC 1E1 FIC 2E1 FIC 4E1 and FIC 1E1 F FIC 2E1 F FIC 4E1 F 161 FIC 8E1 FIC 8E1 F 169 FIC 1T1 FIC 2T1 FIC 4T1 and FIC 1T1 F FIC 2T1 F FIC 4T1 F 172 FIC 8T1 FIC 8T1 F 176 FIC 1CE3 178 FIC 1CT3 180 FIC 4BSE 181 FIC 1AE3 185 FIC 1AT3 186 FIC 1ATM OC3MM FIC 1ATM OC3SM FIC 1ATM OC3SML 188 FIC 1G SHDSL 190 FIC 1POS 191 FIC 2FXS FIC 2FXO FIC 2E amp M and FIC 4FXS FIC 4FXO FIC 4E amp M _ 193 FIC HNDE 197 FIC 2VE1 199 FIC 2VT1 202 FIC 1VE1 204 FIC 1VT1 206 FIC 1 6FSW FIC 1 6FSW PoE DFIC 24FSW DFIC 24FSW PoE FIC IMA 4E1 FIC IMA 8E1 212 FIC IMA 4T1 FIC IMA 8T1 215 FIC 1SHL AW 217 FIC 1CPOS 218 FIC 2BSV FIC 4BSV Module 221 FIC 24FXS 224 DFIC 24FXO24FXS 226 ESM VCPM MODULE ANDE Module 229 SNDE Module 230 VCPM Module 231 208 INTERFACE CARD AND INTERFACE MODULE PURCHASE GUIDE SIC DSIC Purchase Guide 235 MIM DMIM Purchase Guide 236 FIC DFIC Purchase Guide 238 ESM VPM VCPM Purchase Guide 239 ABOUT THIS GUIDE This guide describes the various interface cards and interface modules that are available for use with you H3C MSR 20 30 50 Series router This guide is intended for qualified service personnel who are responsible for configuring using and managing the routers It assumes a working knowledge of local
101. Module 73 Table 42 LEDs on the MIM 1GEF MIM 2GEF panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received blinking means data is being received or and transmitted For MIM 1GEF MIM 2GEF select fiber optic depending on the type of the installed 1000Base SX 1000 Base LX SFP As the interfaces provided by these SFP modules use LC type fiber optic connectors you must use fibers with LC connectors for them Figure 72 LC type fiber optic connector a C type fiber optic connectors were compact fiber optic connectors developed by Lucent a The fibers are provided depending on the purchased SFPs Therefore please provide information on the SFPs when purchasing FICs by default the fibers are not provided CAUTION When connecting the optical fiber observe the following a Do not over bend the optical fiber Its curvature radius must be no less than 10 cm 3 9 in a Ensure that the Tx and Rx ends are correctly connected a Ensure that the fiber ends are clean WARNING Laser danger Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the fiber optic ports which are connected to lasers To protect your eyes against radiation harm never stare into an open fiber optic port Step 1 Insert the SFP optical module into its corresponding slot Step 2 Locate the Rx and Tx ports of the MIM 1GEF MIM 2GEF interface Connect them to another device with t
102. OFF means no data is being received or transmitted Blinking means data is being received and or transmitted The FIC 4BSE uses straight through ISDN S T cables with pins 3 and 6 for data transmission and pins 4 and 5 for data receiving At both ends of ISDN S T cable are RJ 45 connectors Figure 226 Straight through ISDN S T cable interface cables CAUTION If outdoor cabling is involved consider to install a special lightning arrester at the input end of the interface cable for better lightning protection Yellow a Black 4 The standard equipping package for the FIC 4BSE includes the appropriate Green Before you connect a port read its label carefully a wrong connection can cause damages to the interface card and even the device Step 1 Identify the to be connected port on the FIC 4BSE Step 2 Identify the type of the ISDN line provided by your telecommunications service provider Step 3 Connect the cable FIC 1AE3 185 m For an ISDN U interface line adapt the interface with an NT1 by inserting one end of the S T interface cable into the S T port on the NT1 and the other end to the BRI port on the FIC 4BSE a For an ISDN S T interface line directly connect the cable to the BRI port on the FIC 4BSE FIC 1AE3 Introduction FIC 1AE3 the 1 port 34 Mbps ATM E3 interface card provides these functions a Two ATM cell mapping modes ATM direct mapping ADM and physical layer converg
103. POS E FIC 1CPOS T Attribute FIC 1CPOS E FIC 1CPOS T Connector SFP LC Number of 1 Connectors Interface SONET OC 3 SDH STM 1 standard Interface rate 155 52 Mbps Optical Type Multi mode Single mode Single mode Single mode transmitt short haul medium haul long haul ultra long haul er power Min 19 0 dBm 15 0 dBm 5 0 dBm 5 0 dBm Max 14 0 dBm 8 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm Receiver 30 0 dBm 28 0 dBm 34 0 dBm 34 0 dBm sensitivity Overload optical 14 0 dBm 7 0 dBm 9 0 dBm 10 0 dBm power Central 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm wavelength Fiber type 62 5 125 um 9 125 um single 9 125 um single 9 125 um single multi mode mode mode mode Max 2 km 1 2 mi 15 km 9 3 mi 40 km 24 9 mi 80 km 49 7 mi transmission segment CAUTION For a long haul fiber optic interface the transmission distance must be longer than 25 km 15 5 in to allow the receiver to work In case of closer distances insert an optical attenuator to reduce the input optical power The following figure illustrates the FIC 1CPOS E panel 220 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Figure 269 FIC 1CPOS E panel SW p Q Un i CYNI heroes a gs SFP 1850 The following figure illustrates the FIC 1CPOS T panel Figure 270 FIC 1CPOS T panel O O LINK mm C ACTE porco ari m The following table describes the LEDs on the FIC 1CPOS E and F
104. SDN Interface standard Interface rate Interface cable Supported services The following figures illustrate the SIC 1 ADSL I panel Figure 49 SIC 1ADSL I panel HAHH HHI O LINK act SIC aee eee Duu The following table describes the LEDs on the SIC 1ADSL I panels Table 28 LEDs on the SIC 1ADSL I panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present Interface Cable gt Connecting the Interface Cable SIC 1BS SIC 2BS amp SIC 1BU SIC 2BU 55 Table 28 LEDs on the SIC 1ADSL I panel LED Description ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received blinking means data is being received or and transmitted The SIC 1ADSL I uses regular telephone cables for connection The standard equipping package for the SIC 1ADSL I includes a regular telephone cable but the splitter needs a separate order To connect the interface on the SIC 1ADSL I card you need to install a splitter Follow these steps Step 1 Plug one end of a telephone cable into the RJ 11 port on the SIC 1ADSL I on the router and the other end into the internal ADSL I port on the splitter Step 2 Connect an ISDN NT1 to the splitter using another telephone cable Step 3 Connect the external ADSL I port on the splitter to ISDN using a third telephone cable Figure 50 Connect the
105. SDN interface card uses the RJ 11 connector for the WAN interface It allows a LAN subscriber to connect to the DSLAM at the central office over a regular analog subscriber line or telephone line Thus the subscriber can access the ATM IP backbone or the Internet to enjoy services such as high speed data communication and video on demand VoD 54 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS gt Interface Attributes Interface LEDs The card transmits data in the high frequency band above 138 kHz Therefore it can provide services on the same line without interfering with the ISDN service being provided on the same line It provides downlink rates in the range 32 kbps to 8 Mbps and uplink rates in the range 32 kbps to 1 Mbps The SIC 1ADSL I interface card delivers these features a Manual ADSL line activation and deactivation providing a convenient fault location means m A G 992 1 compliant interface auto sensing m Trellis coding on ADSL interfaces enhancing the stability of ADSL connection For H3C MSR 20 40 and MSR 30 50 series routers a SIC 1ADSL I interface card can only be installed in SLOT2 or SLOTA The following table describes the interface attributes of the SIC 1ADSL l Table 27 Interface attributes of the SIC 1ADSL I Attribute 1ADSL I Connector RJ 11 Number of connectors 1 ITU T 992 1 G DMT ANSI T1 413 Issue 2 ITU T 992 3 ITU T 992 5 Downlink 8 Mbps Uplink 1024 kbps Regular telephone cable ADSL over I
106. Table 38 Description of the LEDs on the MIM 1FE MIM 2FE MIM 4FE panel LED Description LINK OFF means the Ethernet link is not connected ON means the link is connected ACTIVE OFF means no data is being transmitted or received blinking means data is being received or and transmitted Interface Cable Ethernet cable Ethernet cables for FE modules are category 5 twisted pair cables with RJ 45 connectors see Figure 66 Pins 1 and 2 of the interface are for data transmission and Pins 3 and 6 are for data receiving Connecting the Interface Cable as MIM 1GBE MIM 2GBE Module 69 Figure 66 Ethernet cable RJ45 RJ45 Making Ethernet cable Category 5 twisted pairs are adopted for making Ethernet cables Each category 5 twisted pair is composed of 8 cores that are identified and grouped by color of insulation sheath Usually a solid color wire and the white solid color wire for it are in pairs But sometimes wires are also paired by color dots Ethernet cables fall into two categories straight through cables and crossover cables specifically a Straight through cable The sequences of the twisted pairs crimped by RJ 45 connectors at both ends are the same It is used for the connection between a terminal device e g PC and router and a Hub LAN Switch The cables delivered with the Router are straight through cables m Crossover cable The sequences of the twisted pairs
107. VCPM card from the mother board Do not overexert when removing the VCPM card because the connector of the daughter board is still on the mother board Step 3 If no SNDE card is to be installed remove the three metal standoffs Installing VCPM card Follow these steps to install VCPM card Step 1 Confirm the correct position of the VCPM card on the mother board Step 2 Fasten the three metal standoffs on the mother board N VCPM Card Application Example VCPM Module 233 Step 3 Install the VCPM card on the mother board and fasten it with three screws During installation align the two connectors under the daughter board to the connectors on the main board to avoid damage to the connectors CAUTION You should align the three fastening holes on the VCPM card to the three fastening holes or metal standoffs on the mother board Misplugging is prone to impair the interface module and even damage the router If a user wants to perform voice communication through data voice interface besides using data voice interface board he can also install a VCPM card on the main board of an MSR 30 series router or in the VCPM slot on the MSCA card on an MSR 50 series router with a certain number of VPM strips installed in the VPM slot as needed A router installed with RTV SIC 1E1 T1 module RTV SIC 1E1 T1 module consumes VCPM and VPM resource when it is operating normally Therefore with RTV SIC 1E1 T1 installed on a router VCPM card and
108. VT1 203 Table 148 Description of the LEDs on FIC 2VT1 panel LED Description LINK ON means carrier signal is received OFF means no carrier signal is received ACT OFF No data is being received and transmitted Blinking Data is being received and transmitted The interface cable of FIC 2VT1 is a standard 100 ohm standard shielding cable The connectors on the two ends use RJ 45 The following figure illustrates this type of cable Figure 249 T1 cable RJ45 RJ45 il ca You can also use a network interface connector to extend the FIC 2VTI cable 8 1 CAUTION The FIC 2VTI cable and network interface connector are optional Please order them together with FIC 2VT1 By default they are not supplied CAUTION a You should connect a cable to the port with the correct mark Misplugging is prone to impair the card and even damage the router a When using T1 cable outdoors you are recommended to install a special lightning arrester on the input end of the cable in order to avoid lightning more effectively If the FIC has been properly installed follow these steps to connect the cable Step 1 Plug one end of T1 cable into the RJ45 connector of FIC 2VT1 Step 2 Connect the other end of T1 cable to the peer device Step 3 Check the status of LINK LED on the FIC 2VT1 panel OFF means the link is not connected In the latter case check the line 204
109. a SIC WARNING H3C MSR 20 30 Series Routers do not support online insertion and removal of SICs and MIMs Before implementing any of the following operations wear an anti static wrist strap and ESD preventive glove and make sure that the power of the Router has been turned off and the power cord has been unplugged Otherwise you may get an electric shock or your router may get damaged CAUTION When replacing installing an interface card or module note the following m Do not damage the EMI gaskets on the card module panel They can filter electromagnetic interference of the router a Jo protect the card or module against ESD damage hold the card module by its edge and do not touch the components on the circuit board Put the uninstalled interface card or module on an antistatic tray a fyou do not install a new card or module after removing the old one replace the blank filter panel to keep off the dust and ensure adequate ventilation of the router Tools required m Flat module screwdriver m ESD preventive wrist strap and ESD preventive glove Removing the blank filler panel in a SIC slot Take the MSR 30 for example Following the rotating direction shown in this figure remove the captive screws of the blank filler panel using the flat module screwdriver Figure 1 Removing the blank filler panel from a SIC slot Installing a SIC Follow these steps to install a SIC Step 1 Place the rear panel of the Router towards
110. able describes the LEDs on the card panels Table 117 LEDs on the FIC 8E1 FIC 8E1 F panels LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACTIVE OFF means no data is being transmitted or received ON means data is being transmitted and or received Interface Cable The FIC 8E1 FIC 8E1 F card provides eight E1 ports and adopts a 120 ohm or a 75 ohm 8E1 conversion cable The two types of cables look similar Both of them have a DB 68 connector at one end for connecting the router At the other end however the 75 ohm 8E1 conversion cable provides 16 coaxial cable connectors and the 120 ohm 8E1 conversion cable provides eight twisted pair cable connectors as shown in the following figures Figure 209 75 ohm 8E1 conversion cable xb y YW XR YB MYN Me XD x6 mM a xt Figure 210 120 ohm 8E1 conversion cable j cwn SS gunning Poss pE por C z 5 172 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Connecting the Interface Cable N FIC 1T1 FIC 2T1 FIC
111. age the MIM and even the Router Step 1 Plug the DB 15 connector of the cable into the DB 15 port on the MIM 1VE1 module and fasten the screws Step 2 Connect the RJ 45 connector of the cable to MIM 1VT1 Module 125 m The peer device directly if the resistance of the port to be connected is 120 ohm and there is no need to extend the cable a A network interface connector and then the peer device using another E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable if the resistance of the port to be connected is 120 ohm and there is a need to extend the cable as illustrated in the following figure Figure 142 Extending E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable DB 15 RJ 45 RJ 45 Voice Router A Device a 120 ohm balanced Network interface 120 ohm E1 twisted pair cable connector trunk cable m The peer device using a 750hm to 1200hm adapter if the resistance of the peer device is 75 ohm Step 3 Check the behavior of the LINK LED on the MIM 1VE1 panel It is OFF when fault has occurred on the link In this case please check the link MIM 1VT1 Module Introduction gt Interface Attributes 1 port T1 voice interface module MIM 1VT1 can handle dense voice signals in VoIP system MIM 1VT1 module is structured in the form of board plus VCPM card plus VPM strip It provides a CT1 PRI port allowing the access of 24 channels of voice signals a VCPM is provide
112. ans no data is being transmitted or received Blinking means data is being transmitted and or received The following figure shows the FIC 8SAE panel Figure 180 FIC 8SAE front panel 1 GBAE lt o 4 1 core o oo ood G eol i oo o ol Jo o jo ro eo aSAE On the FIC 8SAE panel each link corresponds to a LED ON means a link is present blinking means data is being transmitted and or received The FIC SAE cards use synchronous asynchronous serial interface cables with DB 28 connectors Before connecting an FIC SAE card identify the line properties and then select the proper interface cable from the following ten cable options V 24 RS232 DTE cable DB 25 plug at the network end V 24 RS232 DCE cable DB 25 receptacle at the network end V 35 DTE cable 34PIN plug at the network end V 35 DCE cable 34PIN receptacle at the network end X 21 DTE cable DB 15 plug at the network end X 21 DCE cable DB 15 receptacle at the network end RS449 DTE cable DB 37 plug at the network end RS449 DCE cable DB37 receptacle at the network end RS530 DTE cable DB 25 plug at the network end RS530 DCE cable DB25 receptacle at the network end All these cables use a DB 28 connector to connect the router but the connector at the network end varies with the type of the to be connected network V 24 DTE cable FIC 2SAE FIC ASAE FIC 8SAE 157 Figure 181
113. ansmitted or received blinking means data is being received or and transmitted The interface that the FIC 1AE3 provides uses two SMB sockets for data transmitting and receiving respectively The ports adopt the 75 ohm unbalanced transmission mode and are connected to the peer device using a pair of 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial cables Several cable length options are available Figure 228 E3 T3 cable n connector B connector The FIC 1AE3 and the FIC 1AT3 use the same type of cables for connection which are called E3 T3 cables in this manual CAUTION By design the FIC 1AE3 is protected against lightning strikes But when outdoor cabling is involved you are recommended to add a special lightning arrester at the input end of the E3 T3 cable for better protection Step 1 Connect the SMB connector of an E3 T3 cable to the Tx port on the FIC 1AE3 and another end to the Rx port on another device Step 2 Connect the SMB connector of another E3 T3 cable to the Rx port on the FIC 1AE3 and another end to the Tx port on another device Step 3 Check the behavior of the LINK LED on the FIC 1AE3 panel OFF means fault occurs on the line and the signal is out of synchronization Check the line status FIC 1AT3 the 1 port 44 Mbps ATM T3 interface card provides these functions m Two ATM cell mapping modes ADM and PLCP m Scrambling in data transmission m Line clock when working as DTE interface and internal clock when working as DCE int
114. area network LAN operations and familiarity with communication protocols that are used to interconnect LANs Always download the Release Notes for your product from the 3Com World Wide Web site and check for the latest updates to software and product documentation http www 3Com com Conventions Table 1 lists icon conventions that are used throughout this guide Table 1 Notice Icons Icon Notice Type Description i gt Information note nformation that describes important features or instructions M Caution nformation that alerts you to potential loss of data or potential damage to an application system or device A Warning nformation that alerts you to potential personal injury Table 2 lists text conventions that are used throughout this guide Table 2 Text Conventions Convention Description Screen displays This typeface represents information as it appears on the screen Keyboard key names If you must press two or more keys simultaneously the key names are linked with a plus sign for example Press Ctrl Alt Del The words enter and type When you see the word enter in this guide you must type something and then press Return or Enter Do not press Return or Enter when an instruction simply says type 8 ABOUT THIS GUIDE Table 2 Text Conventions Convention Description Words in italics Words in bold Italics are used to Emphasize a point Denote a new term at t
115. ause damages to the interface card and even the device Step 1 Identify type of the interface to be connected and then select the correct cable Step 2 Make connection as follows m f an AUX cable is used Connect the RJ 45 connector of the cable to the router and the DB 25 DB 9 connector to the network device usually a modem a f a dumb terminal cable is used Connect its RJ 45 connector female to a straight through cable and then to a dumb terminal adapter Figure 193 Connect the FIC 8ASE FIC 16ASE cable to a dumb terminal 8ASE 16ASE dumb terminal cable Standard Dumb terminal adapter network cable Dumb adapter Step 3 Power on the router and check behavior of the LINK LED on the FIC SAE card ON means a link is present and OFF means no link is present Check the line for the cause in the latter case FIC 1E1 FIC 2E1 FIC 4E 1 and FIC 1E1 F FIC 2E1 F FIC 4E1 F Introduction FIC 1E1 FIC 2E1 FIC 4E1 FIC 1E1 FIC 2E1 FIC 4E1 the 1 2 4 port channelized E1 PRI interface card transmits receives and processes E1 data traffic In addition you can use the card for other purposes such as CE1 access and the ISDN PRI function 162 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Interface Attributes Interface LEDs FIC 1E1 F FIC 2E1 F FIC 4E1 F FIC 1E1 F FIC 2E1 F FIC 4E1 F the 1 2 4 port fractional E1 interface card differs from the FIC 1E1 FIC 2E1 FIC 4E1 primarily in the sense that m
116. been properly installed follow these steps to connect the interface cable Step 1 Connect the Ethernet port of SIC to a PC or router using a crossover cable and to a Hub or LAN Switch using a straight through cable Step 2 Check the status of LINK LED on the SIC 1FEA panel ON means the link is connected and OFF means the link is not connected In the latter case check the line SIC 1SAE 1 port enhanced high speed synchronous asynchronous serial interface card provides functions similar to SA but its serial interfaces support more protocols such as RS449 X 21 and RS530 The interface attributes of the SIC 1SAE are given in the following table Table 3 Interface attributes of the SIC 1SAE Description Attribute Synchronous Asynchronous Connector DB 28 Number of connectors 1 Interface standard and V 24 V 35 RS449 RS232 operating mode X 21 RS530 DTE DCE DTE DCE Minimum baud rate 1200 1200 300 bps Maximum baud rate 64k 2 048 M 115 2 bps 24 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS Interface LEDs Interface Cable Table 3 Interface attributes of the SIC 1SAE Description Attribute Synchronous Asynchronous Cable V 24 RS232 DTE cable V 24 RS232 DCE cable V 35 DTE cable V 35 DCE cable X 21 DTE cable X 21 DCE cable RS449 DTE cable RS449 DCE cable RS530 DTE cable RS530 DCE cable Supported service 1 DDN leased line 1 Dialup through modems 2 Terminal access service 2 Backup 3 Asyn
117. ble Step 1 Choose a 4E1 8E1 conversion cable appropriate to the interface type of the peer device to be connected a f the interface impedance of the peer device is 75 ohm use a 75 ohm 4E1 8E1 conversion cable m If the interface impedance of the peer device is 120 ohm use a 120 ohm 4E1 8E1 conversion cable 134 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES Step 2 Insert the DB68 connector at one end of the 4E1 8E1 conversion cable to the DB68 interface on the MIM IMA 4E1 MIM IMA 8E1 module and fasten the cable retaining screws Step 3 Identify the sequence numbers of the connectors at the other end of the 4E1 8E1 conversion cable and connect one connector or a pair of connectors to the peer device Step 4 Power on the router Check the status of the LINK LED on the MIM IMA 4E1 MIM IMA 8E1 module panel OFF means the line has problem and signal is out of synchronization In this case please check the line MIM IMA 4T1 MIM IM A 8T1 Module Introduction Interface Attributes Interface LEDs The 4 port 8 port T1 ATM inverse multiplexing interface module MIM IMA 4T 1 MIM IMA 8T1 provides four eight T1 interfaces that support the IMA technology Their network application is similar to that of the MIM IMA 4E1 MIM IMA 8E1 module The following table describes the interface attributes of the MIM IMA 4T1 MIM IMA 8T1 module Table 92 Interface attributes of MIM IMA 4T1 MIM IMA 8T1 Description Attr
118. ble describes the LEDs on the MIM 1AT3 panel 110 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES Interface Cable gt Connecting the Interface Cable AN Table 70 Description of the LEDs on the MIM 1AT3 panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received blinking means data is being received or and transmitted External ports provided by MIM 1AT3 module are two SMB sockets respectively functioning as Tx end and Rx end for transmitting data and receiving data The ports work in 75 ohm unbalanced transmission mode and are connected to the peer device using a pair of 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial cables as shown in Figure 121 Several cable length options are available MIM 1AE3 and MIM 1AT3 modules use the same type of cables for connection which are called E3 T3 cables in this manual CAUTION Some measures have been taken to protect MIM 1AT3 module To achieve better lightning protection effects however you are recommended to add a special lightning arrester at the input end of the E3 T3 cable when leading it to the outdoors Step 1 Connect the SMB connector of an E3 T3 cable to the Tx port of MIM 1AT3 module and another end to the Rx port on the device to be connected Step 2 Connect the SMB connector of another E3 T3 cable to the Rx port of MIM 1AT3 module and another end to the Tx port on the device to be connected Step 3 Ch
119. cal interface module MIM 2GBE 1 port 1000Base SX 1000Base LX gigabit Ethernet fiber interface module MIM 1GEF 2 port 1000Base SX 1000Base LX gigabit Ethernet fiber interface module MIM 2GEF 16 port 10 100 Mbps Layer 2 switching interface module MIM 16FSW 24 port 10 100 Mbps Layer 2 switching interface module DMIM 24FSW 16 port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Layer 2 switching PoE interface module DMIM 16FSW POE 24 port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Layer 2 switching PoE interface module DMIM 24FSW POE MIM DMIM XMIM 11 16 port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Layer 2 switching interface module XMIM 16FSW 24 port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Layer 2 switching interface module XMIM 24FSW WAN modules _ 2 port enhanced high speed synchronous asynchronous serial interface module MIM 2SAE 4 port enhanced high speed synchronous asynchronous serial interface module MIM 4SAE 8 port enhanced high speed synchronous asynchronous serial interface module MIM 8SAE 8 port enhanced asynchronous serial interface module MIM 8ASE 16 port enhanced asynchronous serial interface module MIM 16ASE 1 port channelized E1 interface module MIM 1E1 2 port channelized E1 interface module MIM 2E1 4 port channelized E1 interface module MIM 4E1 8 port channelized E1 interface module MIM 8E1 1 port fractional E1 interface module MIM 1E1 F 2 port fractional E1 interface module MIM 2E1 F 4 port fractional E1 interface module MIM 4E1 F 8 port fractiona
120. cannot share the same line with POTS or ISDN just like what ADSL has done The MIM 1G SHDSL module supports a Manual G SHDSL line activation deactivation and easy to use fault isolation tools m G 992 1 interface standard and auto sensing The interface attributes of MIM 1G SHDSL are given in the following table Table 63 Interface attributes of MIM 1G SHDSL module Attribute MIM 1G SHDSL module Connector RJ11 Number of connectors 1 Interface standard G 991 2 Interface rate In single pair mode supports the sending receiving independent symmetric speed in the range 192 kbps to 2304 kbps with the step length being 8 kbps Cable Telephone cable Supported service G SHDSL access over telephone lines MIM 1G SHDSL panel is shown in the following figure Figure 116 MIM 1G SHDSL panel O ooooo O O LINK iG SHDsLO ACT 1G SHDSL ft A r i I i h fT hf Th T T n on J The following table describes the LEDs on the MIM 1G SHDSL panel Interface Cable gt Connecting the Interface Cable MIM 1AMM MIM 1AS M MIM 1ASL Introduction Interface Attributes MIM 1AMM MIM 1ASM MIM 1ASL 105 Table 64 Description of the LEDs on the MIM 1G SHDSL panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received blinking means data
121. ce module interface module module Min 9 5 dBm 9 dBm 2 dBm 4 dBm 4 dBm Max 0 dBm 3 dBm 5 dBm 1 dBm 2 dBm Receiver sensitivity 17 dBm 20 dBm 23 dBm 21 dBm 22 dBm Central 850 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm wavelength Fiber type 62 5125 9 125um 9 125 um 9 125um 9 125um um single mode single mode single mode single mode multimode Max transmission 0 55 km 10 km 6 21 40km 24 86 40km 24 86 70 km 43 50 segment 0 34 mi mi mi mi mi 62 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS Table 33 Interface attributes of SIC 1BSV SIC 2BSV Attribute Description Operating mode 100 Mbps Full duplex Interface LEDs The following figure illustrates the SIC 1FEF panel Figure 59 SIC 1FEF pane ee ae me AA LINK ACT i SIC SFP 100M 1FEF The following table describes the LEDs on the SIC 1FEF panel Table 34 LEDs on SIC 1FEF panel LED Status Description LINK ACT OFF No link is present Steady green The SFP optical module has established a 100 Mbps link Blinking green Data is being received and transmitted Steady yellow Information detection failed Interface Cable For SIC 1FEF select fibers depending on the type of the installed SFP removable optical module As the interfaces provided by these SFP modules use LC type fiber optic
122. ce cables CAUTION If outdoor cabling is involved consider to install a special lightning arrester at the input end of the interface cable for better lightning protection Before you connect a port read its label carefully a wrong connection can cause damages to the interface card and even the device Step 1 Identify the to be connected port on the MIM 4BSE Step 2 Identify the type of the ISDN line provided by your telecommunications service provider Step 3 Connect the cable 104 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES a For an ISDN U interface line adapt the interface with an NT1 by inserting one end of the S T interface cable into the S T port on the NT1 and the other end to the BRI port on the MIM 4BSE a For an ISDN S T interface line directly connect the cable to the BRI port on the MIM 4BSE MIM 1G SHDSL Introduction Interface Attributes Interface LEDs 1 port Single Pair High Speed Digital Subscriber Line module MIM 1G SHDSL adopts the Trellis Coded Pulse Amplitude Modulation TCPAM approach and can provide the symmetric speed as high as 2 3 Mbps Its transmission speed can automatically adapt to cable length and conditions Compared with ADSL G SHDSL allows longer transmission distance and as such can serve a wider range of applications It can substitute for E1 T1 lines to provide high speed data service access However as TCPAM uses the band starting from 0 Hz for data transmission G SHDSL
123. ceiving and processing one channel of T3 fast traffic providing T3 traffic access m In CT3 mode providing the subscribers with N x 64 kbps or N x 56 kbps low speed access where N is smaller than or equal to 128 T3 represents the tertiary group rate of T system in the TDM system that is 44 736 Mbps Through T23 and T12A demultiplexing a T3 channel can be channelized into 28 T1 lines each also supporting the operating mode of CT1 123 means either T2 to T3 multiplex or T3 to T2 demultiplex and T12 means T1 to T2 multiplex or T2 to T1 demultiplex T23 and T12 discussed here represent the demultiplex process The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC 1CT3 Table 124 FIC 1CT3 interface attributes Attribute Description Connector SMB Number of connectors 2 Interface standard G 703 G 704 G 752 AT amp T TR 54014 AT amp T TR 62415 ANSI T1 107 44 736 Mbps T3 cable 75 ohm coaxial cable Interface rate Cable Operating mode T3 CT3 Supported service T3 leased line The following figure illustrates an FIC 1CT3 panel Interface Cable FIC 4BSE 181 Figure 223 FIC 1CT3 panel LNKIACT O O O Q LPIAL O TX RX To The following table describes the LEDs on the card panel Table 125 LEDs on the FIC 1CT3 panel LED Description LINK ACT ON means the carrier signal has been received
124. chronous leased line 4 Terminal access SIC 1SAE panel is shown in the following figure Figure 7 SIC 1SAE panel GRE UA TRE LU LINK SYNGIASYNC SERIAL ee eee eee _ ISA trTTrTW TA To tt at fly Description of the LEDs on SIC 1SAE panel is given in the following table Table 4 LEDs on SIC 1SAE panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received Blinking means data is being received or and transmitted The SIC 1SAE uses a synchronous asynchronous serial interface cable with DB 28 connectors for connection Before connecting to a port on the SIC 1SAE confirm the line properties of the interface to select an appropriate cable from the following cable options a V 24 RS232 DTE cable DB 25 male connector at the network end SIC 1SAE 25 V 24 RS232 DCE cable DB 25 female connector at the network end V 35 DTE cable 34PIN male connector at the network end V 35 DCE cable 34PIN female connector at the network end X 21 DTE cable DB 15 male connector at the network end X 21 DCE cable DB 15 female connector at the network end RS449 DTE cable DB 37 male connector at the network end RS449 DCE cable DB 37 female connector at the network end RS530 DTE cable DB 25 male connector at the net
125. clean WARNING Laser danger Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the fiber optic ports which are connected to lasers To protect your eyes against radiation harm never stare into an open fiber optic port Step 1 Insert the SFP optical module into its corresponding slot Step 2 Locate the Rx and Tx ports of the GEF interface Connect them to another device with two optical fibers Rx to Tx and Tx to Rx Step 3 Power on the router and check the behavior of the LINK LED on the card panel ON means an Rx link is present and OFF means the opposite In the latter case check the line status FIC 2SAE FIC 4SAE FIC 8SAE Introduction FIC 2SAE FIC 4SAE FIC 8SAE 2 4 8 port enhanced high speed synchronous asynchronous serial interface card transmits receives and processes data on the synchronous asynchronous serial interface They support both synchronous and asynchronous modes In the former case they support the DTE DCE mode 154 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS b gt Interface Attributes DTE and DCE An FIC SA card is usually connected to an external modem for dialing purpose where an appropriate baud rate setting is required The synchronous serial interface can work in either DTE or DCE mode Two directly connected devices must work as DTE and DCE respectively The DCE provides clock synchronization and specifies the communication rate whereas the DTE accepts clock synchronization and communicate
126. connectors you must use fibers with LC connectors for them Figure 60 LC type fiber optic connector i gt LC type fiber optic connectors are compact fiber optic connectors developed by Lucent Push an LC type fiber optic connector to connect it to the optical module and press the button on the connector to remove it The fibers are provided depending on the purchased SFPs Therefore please provide information on the SFPs when purchasing interface cards by default the fibers are not provided Connecting the Interface Cable AN SIC 8AS 63 CAUTION When connecting the optical fiber observe the following a Do not over bend the optical fiber Its curvature radius must be no less than 10 cm 3 9 in a Ensure that the Tx and Rx ends are correctly connected a Ensure that the fiber ends are clean WARNING Laser danger Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the fiber optic ports which are connected to lasers To protect your eyes against radiation harm never stare into an open fiber optic port Step 1 Insert the SFP optical module into its corresponding slot Step 2 Locate the Rx and Tx ports of the SIC 1FEF interface Connect them to another device with two optical fibers Rx to Tx and Tx to Rx Step 3 Power on the router and check the behavior of the LINK LED on the SIC 1FEF panel ON means an Rx link is present and OFF means the opposite In the latter case check the line status SIC 8AS Introduction
127. connectors are BNC receptacles that can be used to connect two 75 ohm non balanced coaxial cables with BNC connectors a 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable Figure 42 E1 G 703 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable H Be iri dg gluu uuu g 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable connects SIC 1VE1 with the DB 15 connector and network end with the RJ 45 connector 48 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS gt N Connecting the Interface Cable N A network interface connector is available for extending the E1 cable Both ends of the connector are RJ 45 jacks that can be used to connect two 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cables In addition a 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter is available For the pinouts of E1 cables see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual CAUTION E1 cable coaxial connector network interface connector and 750hm to 1200hm adapter are optional Please order them together with SIC 1VE1 By default they are not supplied CAUTION When using E1 cable outdoors you are recommended to install a special lightning arrester on the input end of the cable in order to avoid lightning more effectively If the SIC has been properly installed follow these steps to connect the cable Step 1 Check the type of E1 cable and correctly set the DIP switch the ex factory setting of the interfac
128. cription LINK ACT OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present Blinking means data is being received or and transmitted Interface Cable The SIC 8AS uses the customized cable which is illustrated by the following figure SIC 8BAS 65 Figure 62 Customized cable B uuuuu B Aa AA AA amp CAUTION This customized cable is optional You need to order it when you purchase a SIC 8AS card Jin Connecting the Interface Cable Ay WARNING Do not plug or unplug the interface cable of the SIC 8AS card when the router is running otherwise the router and the ports may be damaged Step 1 Connect the power cable and telephone cable to the Modem or terminal device Step 2 Plug one end of the AUX cable the DB60 connector to the router and fasten the screws on the connector and plug the other end of the cable to the Modem or terminal Step 3 Check the LINK ACT LED status on the SIC 8AS panel ON means the link is present OFF means no link is present If the LED is OFF check the line 66 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES For the modu
129. ct a PC or another router use a crossover cable to connect a LAN Switch or HUB use a straight through cable Step 1 Connect one end of the cable to the Ethernet port and the other end to the peer device Step 2 Check the status of LINK LED on the 1GBE panel ON means the link is connected and OFF means the link is not connected In the latter case check the line MIM 1GEF MIM 2GEF Module Introduction Interface Attributes MIM 1GEF MIM 2GEF is short for 1 2 port 1000Base SX 1000Base LX GE fiber interface module where GE is short for Gigabit Ethernet and F for fiber indicating optical fiber interface MIM 1GEF MIM 2GEF is used for the communication between router and LAN MIM 1GEF MIM 2GEF supports a Five types of 1000Base LX 1000Base SX SFP removable modules multi mode short haul 850 nm single mode medium haul 1310 nm single mode long haul 1310 nm single mode long haul 1550 nm and single mode ultra long haul 1550 nm a 1000 Mbps interface rate a Full duplex The interface attributes of MIM 1GEF MIM 2GEF are given in the following table Table 41 Interface attributes of MIM 1GEF MIM 2GEF Description Attribute MIM 1GEF MIM 2GEF Number of 1 2 interfaces Connector SFP LC Interface 802 3 802 3u 802 3ab standard 72 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES Interface LEDs
130. ctor Step 4 Connect the E1 cable to the device to be connected For the procedures see Connecting interface cable of MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 and MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F modules on page 87 Step 5 Check the behavior of the LINK LED on the module panel It is OFF when fault has occurred on the link and signal is out of synchronization In this case please check the link MIM 8E1 MIM 8E1 F Module 89 MIM 8E1 MIM 8E1 F Module Introduction gt Interface Attributes Interface LEDs MIM 8E1 module MIM 8E1 the 8 port channelized E1 PRI interface module transmits receives and processes eight channels of E1 data traffic In addition you can use the module for other purposes such as CE1 access and the ISDN PRI function MIM 8E1 F module MIM 8E1 F the 8 port fractional E1 interface module is different from the MIM 8E1 module in the sense that a The FE1 operating mode supported by the MIM 8E1 F module allows only one n x 64 kbps bundle to be formed on each interface where n 1 to 31 However an MIM 8E1 module allows arbitrary grouping of 31 channels and therefore multiple bundles a The MIM 8E1 F module does not support PRI mode Given a MIM 8E1 module the system automatically creates a serial interface for each timeslot bundle formed on a controller E1 interface The interface attributes of the MIM 8E1 and the MIM 8E1 F are given in the following table Table 50 Interface attributes of the MIM 8E1 and
131. ctor 2 MIM 2VT1 Module Table 80 Interface attributes of MIM 2VT1 Attribute Description Interface standard G 703 T1 102 G 704 Interface rate Cable type Operation mode Services AT amp T TR 54016 AT amp T TR 62411 ANSI T1 403 1 544 Mbps T1 cable 100 ohm standard shielded cable CT1 ISDN PRI Backup Terminal access ISDN Interface LEDs MIM 2VT1 panel is shown in the following figure Figure 137 MIM 2VT1 panel J 5 PI TDP A ATA AAAA z O O O O oo 680000000000000 S LINK LINKO gt vu OA cT1 PRI ATO wn i yA it 4 ff Ti f n gt The following table describes the LEDs on the MIM 2VT1 panel Table 81 Description of the LEDs on the MIM 2VT1 panel LED Description LINK ACT ON means carrier signal is received OFF means no carrier signal is received OFF No data is being received and transmitted Blinking Data is being received and transmitted gt The MIM 2VT1 module is 1U in height occupying two slots Interface Cable The interface cable of MIM 2VT1 is a standard 100 ohm standard shielding cable The connectors on the two ends use RJ 45 The following figure illustrates this type of cable 122 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES AN Connecting the Interface Cable N Figure
132. ctors to your cable distribution frame or connect them to the phones directly or after being prolonged Step 1 Connect the D50 male connector on one end of the cable to the card Step 2 Connect the RJ11 connectors on the other end of the cable to telephones Faxes or the ATO loop trunk lines of the telephone switchboards CAUTION The screws at both sides of the FIC 24FXS module interface should be fixed to avoid loss of them 226 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS DFIC 24FXO24FXS Introduction Interface Attributes Interface LEDs Interface Cable The DFIC 24FXO24FXS provides 24 port voice subscriber circuit and 24 port voice ATO analog trunk circuit FXS interfaces process and transmit voice signals over data communications networks for 24 regular analog phones faxes or ATO loop trunks of teleohone exchanges The FXO interfaces process and transmit voice signals over data communications networks for 24 loops of telephone exchanges Table 169 Interface attributes of the DFIC 24FXO24FXS module Attribute Description Connector 50 pin D type female connector Interface standard FXS and FXO interface Interface rate 24 x FXO interface rate plus 24 x FXS interface rate DFIC 24FXO24FXS has two kinds of LEDs Active and Link Table 170 Description of LEDs on the DFIC 24FXO24FXS panel LED FXO interface FXS interface Active OFF means all links are idle OFF means all links are idle Blinking means one or more Blin
133. d package of RT FIC FE cards are straight through cables Step 1 Plug one end of the cable to an Ethernet port on the router and another end to the device to be connected For a PC or router use a straight through cable for a HUB or LAN switch use a crossover cable Step 2 Power on the router and check the behavior of the LINK LED on the FIC FE panel ON means that a link is present and OFF means that no link is present In the latter case check the line status CAUTION Before you connect a port read its label carefully a wrong connection can cause damages to the interface card and even the device FIC 1GBE FIC 2GBE Introduction FIC 1GBE FIC 2GBE the 1 port 2 port 10Base T 100Base TX 1000Base T Ethernet electrical interface card is used for router to LAN communication The cards support m 100 meters 328 1 ft of transmission segment over the category 5 twisted pair cable 150 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Interface Attributes Interface LEDs Interface Cable m Operation at 1000 Mbps 100 Mbps and 10 Mbps auto sensing a Half duplex full duplex autosensing The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC 1GBE FIC 2GBE Table 104 Interface attributes of the FIC 1GBE FIC 2GBE Attribute FIC 1GBE FIC 2GBE Connector RJ 45 Number of connectors 1 2 Interface type MDI MDIX Interface standard 802 3 802 3u and 802 3ab Cable type Ethernet cable Operating mo
134. d to users together with MIM 1VT1 Users can select VPM module as needed a VPM module is installed on the main board of MIM 1VT1 The interface attributes of MIM 1VT1 are given in the following table Table 84 Interface attributes of MIM 1VT1 Attribute Description Connector RJ45 Number of connector 1 Interface standard G 703 T1 102 G 704 AT amp T TR 54016 AT amp T TR 62411 ANSI T1 403 126 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES Table 84 Interface attributes of MIM 1VT1 Attribute Description Interface rate 1 544 Mbps Cable type Operation mode Services T1 cable 100 ohm standard shielded cable CT1 ISDN PRI Backup Terminal access ISDN Interface LEDs MIM 1VT1 panel is shown in the following figure Figure 143 MIM 1VT1 panel co99900900900000000000000O FR O O iw O O oo eeooooooooooooo AN O LINK z wm OAcT eTUPRI 4VT1 dnOoocconod 9 Aqneeqasq AamMmoac The following table describes the LEDs on the MIM 1VT1 panel Table 85 Description of the LEDs on the MIM 1VT1 panel LED Description LINK ACT ON means carrier signal is received OFF means no carrier signal is received OFF No data is being received and transmitted Blinking Data is being received and transmitted i gt The MIM 1VT1 module is 1U in height occu
135. data transmission place the jumper over pins 1 and 2 To do otherwise place the jumper over jump pins 2 and 3 See Figure 113 To use a 100 ohm matched resistance for data receiving place the jumper over jump pins 1 and 2 To do otherwise place the jumper over jump pins 2 and 3 See Figure 113 Interface S4 1 To use a 100 ohm matched resistance for data transmission place the jumper over pins 1 and 2 To do otherwise place the jumper over jump pins 2 and 3 See Figure 113 S3 To use a 100 ohm matched resistance for data receiving place the jumper over jump pins 1 and To do otherwise place the jumper over jump pins 2 and 3 See Figure 113 Interface S6 2 To use a 100 ohm matched resistance for data transmission place the jumper over pins 1 and 2 To do otherwise place the jumper over jump pins 2 and 3 See Figure 113 S5 To use a 100 ohm matched resistance for data receiving place the jumper over jump pins 1 and 2 To do otherwise place the jumper over jump pins 2 and 3 See Figure 113 Interface S8 3 To use a 100 ohm matched resistance for data transmission place the jumper over pins 1 and 2 To do otherwise place the jumper over jump pins 2 and 3 See Figure 113 S7 To use a 100 ohm matched resistance for data receiving place the jumper over jump pins 1 and 2 To do otherwise place the jumper over jump pins 2 and 3 See Figure 113
136. de 10 100 1000 Mbps auto sensing Half duplex full duplex autosensing The following figures show the FIC 1GBE and FIC 2GBE panels Figure 172 FIC 1GBE panel D uK O o ACT O 1GBE 1ce 1000BaseTX g rT EA Ei i a Figure 173 FIC 2GBE panel D s i ACT O ACT 9 1000Base T 1 C The following table describes the LEDs on the FIC 1 GBE FIC 2GBE panel Table 105 LEDs on the FIC 1GBE FIC 2GBE panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received Blinking means data is being transmitted and or received FIC 1GBE FIC 2GBE uses both crossover and straight through cables for connection Connecting the Interface Cable FIC 1GEF FIC 2GEF Introduction Interface Attributes Figure 174 Ethernet cable FIC 1GEF FIC 2GEF 151 Step 1 Connect one end of the cable to the Ethernet interface on the router and the other end to another device Step 2 Power on the router and check the behavior of the LINK LED on the panel ON means a link is present and OFF means no link is present In the latter case check the line status FIC 1GEF FIC 2GEF the 1 port 2 port 1000Base SX 1000Base LX GE fiber interface card is used for router to LAN communication The cards support
137. dressing Backup Jumper Settings The FIC 4BSE uses jumpers to set matched resistance for ISDN BRI S T interfaces The use of 100 ohm resistance on an ISDN BRI S T interface depends on jumper settings The following figure shows the jumper settings where all the ISDN BRI S T interfaces are using 100 ohm resistance Figure 224 Jumper settings of the FIC 4BSE example S1 e S4 eee S5 eee S7 eee o S3 S6 eee S8 eee HH S2 0 1 2 3 The following table describes how to set jumpers Interface LEDs Table 127 Set the jumpers on the FIC 4BSE Jumper settings amp description FIC 4BSE 183 Default Interface O S2 S1 To use a 100 ohm matched resistance for data transmission place the jumper over pins 1 and 2 To do otherwise place the jumper over jump pins 2 and 3 See Figure 224 To use a 100 ohm matched resistance for data receiving place the jumper over jump pins 1 and To do otherwise place the jumper over jump pins 2 and 3 See Figure 224 Interface 1 S4 To use a 100 ohm matched resistance for data transmission place the jumper over pins 1 and 2 To do otherwise place the jumper over jump pins 2 and 3 See Figure 224 S3 To use a 100 ohm matched resistance for data receiving place the jumper over jump pins 1 and 2 To do otherwise place the jumper over jump pins 2 and 3 Se
138. dules MIM 16FSW MIM 16FSW PoE and DMIM 24FSW DMIM 24FSW PoE are applicable to MSR 30 series routers A router installed with MIM 16FSW or DMIM 24FSW can work as a switching routing integrated device on a small sized enterprise network to connect PCs and network devices inside the network directly MIM 16FSW PoE DMIM 24FSW PoE can supply power to PDs through PoE The interfaces provided on the MIM 16FSW and DMIM 24FSW module are as follows m 16x 10 100 Mbps RJ45 connector interfaces on the MIM 16FSW module 128 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES Interface Attributes gt Interface LEDs m 24x 10 100 Mbps RJ45 connector interfaces on the DMIM 24FSW module m 2 x 10 100 1000 Mbps gigabit RJ45 connector electrical interfaces on the DMIM 24FSW module m 2 SFP fiber interfaces Fiber interfaces and gigabit electrical interfaces share the MAC layer on the DMIM 24FSW module The interface cards support m 100 meters 328 1 ft of transmission distance over the category 5 twisted pair cable m 100 meters 328 1 ft of transmission distance between any interfaces over the category 5 twisted pair cable m Operation at 100 Mbps and 10 Mbps autosensing a Full duplex and half duplex with the former in common use m 24FSW provides two Combo interfaces as shown in Table 86 By default the electrical interfaces take effect The interface attributes of the MIM 16FSW MIM 16FSW PoE DMIM 24FSW DMIM 24FSW PoE are give
139. e for each PCM data voice channel VCPM module is a required module for voice communications of routers 232 CHAPTER 5 ESM VCPM MODULE Interface Attributes Interface LEDs Installing Removing VCPM Card Table 175 Interface attributes of the VCPM module Attribute Description Connector Double edge connector Interface type PCI 2 2 EHPI Data transmission rate Operating rate for PCI bus 33 MHz 66 MHz Maximum bandwidth 264 Mbps BURST transmission Up to 1 KB of data can be transmitted once and the maximum number of bytes transmitted can be configured There is no LED on the VCPM card and display of the status of the module is implemented through the VCPM interface LED on the main board of the router The following table describes the LEDs on the main board Table 176 Description on the LEDs LED Description VCPMx Green VCPM card is in the slot and is operating normally Yellow VCPM card is in the slot but cannot be accessed by the router Note X means the slot number VCPM card LED is on VCPM card should be installed on the main board of the MSR 30 router and on the VCPM slot on the MSCA card of MSR 30 router The board that provides VCPM slots is referred to hereafter as mother board Suppose the mother board is uninstalled and put on the workbench Removing VCPM card Follow these steps to uninstall the VCPM card Step 1 Remove the three fastening screws on the VCPM card Step 2 Remove the
140. e 228 Several cable length options are available The FIC 1AT3 and FIC 1AE3 cards use the same type of cables for connection which are called E3 T3 cables in this manual 188 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Connecting the Interface Cable N FIC 1ATM OC3MM FIC 1ATM OC3SM FIC 1ATM OC3SML Introduction b gt Interface Attributes CAUTION By design the FIC 1AT3 is protected against lightning strikes But when outdoor cabling is involved you are recommended to add a special lightning arrester at the input end of the E3 T3 cable for better protection Step 1 Connect the SMB connector of an E3 T3 cable to the Tx port on the FIC 1AT3 and another end to the Rx port on another device Step 2 Connect the SMB connector of another E3 T3 cable to the Rx port on the FIC 1AT3 and another end to the Tx port on another device Step 3 Check the behavior of the LINK LED on the FIC 1AT3 panel OFF means fault occurs on the line and the signal is out of synchronization Check the line status Three ATM fiber interface card options are available with your router a 1 port ATM 155 Mbps multi mode fiber interface card FIC 1ATM OC3MM u 1 port ATM 155 Mbps single mode fiber interface card FIC 1 ATM OC3SM mu 1 port ATM 155 Mbps single mode long haul fiber interface card FIC 1 ATM OC3SML They provide the following functions a Two frame formats SDH STM 1 and SONET OC 3 a Scrambling in data transmission a Line clock when
141. e DIP switch BlTs are in the ON position factory default which means the impedance of E1 ports is 75 ohm 168 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Connecting the Interface Cable AN CAUTION Before you connect a port read its label carefully a wrong connection can cause damages to the interface card and even the device If outdoor cabling is involved consider to install a special lightning arrester at the input end of the interface cable for better lightning protection Connecting the interface cable of the FIC 1E1 FIC 2E1 FIC 1E1 F FIC 2E1 F Step 1 Identify type of the E1 cable and set the DIP switch for the to be connected E1 FE1 port correctly Step 2 Plug the DB 15 connector of the E1 cable into the E1 FE1 port on the card Step 3 Connect the other end of the E1 cable to another device When using a 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial cable do the following m f no cable extension is needed directly connect the BNC connector of the cable to the device m f cable extension is needed connect the BNC connector of the cable to a coaxial connector and then connect the other end of the coaxial connector to the device using a 75 ohm E1 trunk cable CAUTION When connecting the router to another device using an E1 coaxial cable make connection with the TX end to the RX end and the RX end to the TX end Figure 205 Extending an E1 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial cable DB 15 NC BNC Network Router devices Coaxial connector
142. e E amp M analog trunk interface card FIC 4E amp M 1 port E1 voice interface card FIC 1VE1 1 port T1 voice interface card FIC 1VT1 2 port E1 voice interface card FIC 2VE1 2 port T1 voice interface card FIC 2VT1 2 port ISDN BRI S T voice interface card MIM 2BSV 4 port ISDN BRI S T voice interface card MIM 4BSV 24 port voice subscriber circuit interface card FIC 24FXS 24 port voice subscriber circuit interface card amp 24 port voice ATO analog trunk interface card DFIC 24FXO24FXS High performance network data encryption card FIC HNDE Data encryption card SIC MIM FIC Purchase Guideline You may equip an H3C series router with appropriate interface cards or modules and are allowed to a Install multiple interface cards or modules of the same type on the router a Install an interface card or module in any slot on the router disregarding its type Also you should m Select interface cable appropriate to each interface card or module m See Interface Card and Interface Module Purchase Guide on page 235 for the full capacity specifications appropriate to your router model m See Interface Card and Interface Module Purchase Guide on page 235 for the interface cards and modules you are allowed to select The VE1 module the VT1 module and the 12AM module are 1U in height each occupying two slots 16 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW Installation Removal of a SIC MIM FIC A Installing Removing
143. e Figure 224 Interface 2 S6 To use a 100 ohm matched resistance for data transmission place the jumper over pins 1 and 2 To do otherwise place the jumper over jump pins 2 and 3 See Figure 224 S5 To use a 100 ohm matched resistance for data receiving place the jumper over jump pins 1 and To do otherwise place the jumper over jump pins 2 and 3 See Figure 224 Interface 3 S8 To use a 100 ohm matched resistance for data transmission place the jumper over pins 1 and 2 To do otherwise place the jumper over jump pins 2 and 3 See Figure 224 S7 To use a 100 ohm matched resistance for data receiving place the jumper over jump pins 1 and 2 To do otherwise place the jumper over jump pins 2 and 3 See Figure 224 The following figure illustrates the FIC 4BSE panel The jumpers are placed over jump pins 2 and 3 meaning 100 ohm matched resistances are not used 184 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Interface Cable gt Connecting the Interface Cable N Figure 225 FIC 4BSE panel D I LINK ABSE O Am 4BSE L lii Tomoe L acca ii The following table describes the LEDs on the card panel Table 128 LEDs on the FIC 4BSE panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT
144. e LED is off contact your agent for help SIC 1BSV SIC 2BSV Introduction SIC 1BSV SIC 2BSV is short for 1 2 port ISDN BRI S T voice interface card which is mainly used to process receive transmit and compress decompress the ISDN interface voice traffic The interface s on the SIC 1BSV SIC 2BSV card is are ITU T 430 compliant adopting pseudo ternary coding providing 192 Kbps interface rate and allowing the maximum transmission distance of 1 km 0 6 mi in point to point mode In the upstream direction the SIC 1BSV SIC 2BSV card can be connected to a user interface on an ISDN switch to receive and decompress compress and transmit ISDN BRI digital voice traffic In the downstream direction the card can be connected to a TE device to forward the voice packets from the TE device to the Internet through a WAN interface on the router thus implementing VolP The card has the following features m A BSV interface supports two modes user and network respectively for connecting an ISDN network and a TE device a When a BSV interface works in network mode traffic is processed as follows The digital voice traffic received on the BSV interface is compressed and forwarded through the CPU on the main control board to a WAN interface The IP voice traffic received on a WAN interface is forwarded through the CPU on the main control board to SIC 1BSV SIC 2BSV where the traffic is decompressed and sent to the TE device a When a BSV inte
145. e LEDs 1 port channelized E3 interface module MIM 1CE3 serves to a Transmit Receive and handle one channel of E3 fast traffic as well as provide the accessing of E3 traffic when working in E3 mode and m Provide the low speed accessing service at the speed of n x 64 kbps where n is smaller than or equal to 128 when working in CE3 mode a 3 represents the tertiary group rate of E system in the TDM system that is 34 368Mbps An E3 channel can be channelized into 16 E1 lines through the demultiplexing processes of E23 and E12 each E1 line supporting both the operating modes of E1 and CE1 E23 is used to indicate either E2 to E3 multiplex or E3 to E2 demultiplex and E12 to indicate E1 to E2 multiplex or E2 to E1 demultiplex E23 and E12 discussed here represent the demultiplex process a The two E3 channels of 2CE3 can work in E3 and CE3 mode respectively The interface attributes of MIM 1CE3 are given in the following table Table 56 Interface attributes of 1CE3 Attribute Description Connector SMB Number of connectors 2 Interface standard G 703 G 704 G 751 Interface rate 34 368 Mbps Interface cable type E3 cable 75ohm coaxial cable Operating mode E3 CE3 Supported service E3 leased line MIM 1CE3 panel is shown in the following figure Figure 110 MIM 1CE3 panel PN USSU 7 JJOUUGUJOSE O SSE FA LINK i i pd ACT O 1CE3 t ar T Th p j T
146. e LEDs on FIC 2VE1 panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACTIVE OFF means no data is being transmitted or received Blinking means there is data being transmitted or received Interface Cable FIC 2VE1 interface cables are G 703 compliant 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cables At one end of the cable is a DB 15 male connector for the connection to the Router and at the other end is an RJ 45 connector for the connection to the network Figure 245 E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable E i MM m dB x2 gluuuuulg xl If the cable with the resistance of 75 ohm is needed a 75 ohm to 120 ohm cable adapter one end is BNC connector and the other end is RJ 45 connector which is illustrated in the following figure can be installed Figure 246 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter with BNC connector P gt S AN ab n 7 Connecting the Interface Cable A FIC 2VE1 201 CAUTION For the convenience of extending the connection of E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable you can use network interface connector E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable network interface connector 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter are optional accessories Please select one when purchasing a FIC 2VE1 module by default they are not provided Fo
147. e are different in the sense that m FT1 operating mode supported by T1 F modules allows only one bundle In other words the time slots can only be bundled into one nx64 kbps or 56 kbps channel where n 1 24 However a CT1 module allows of arbitrary grouping of the 24 channels m T1 F does not support PRI mode Given a MIM 1T1 module the system automatically creates a serial interface for each timeslot bundle formed on a controller T1 interface The interface attributes of MIM 1T1 MIM 2T1 MIM 4T1 and MIM 1T1 F MIM 2T1 F MIM 4T1 F modules are given in the following table Table 52 Interface attributes of MIM 1T1 MIM 2T1 MIM 4T1 and MIM 1T1 F MIM 2T1 F MIM 4T1 F modules Attribute Connector Number of connectors Interface standard Interface rate Cable type Operating mode Supported service Description RJ 45 1 MIM 1T1 MIM 1T1 F module 2 MIM 2T1 MIM 2T1 F module 4 MIM 4T1 MIM 4T1 F module G 703 T1 102 G 704 AT amp T TR 54016 AT amp T TR 62411 ANSI T1 403 1 544 Mbps T1 cable 100 ohm shielding network cable CT1 ISDN PRI MIM 1T1 MIM 2T1 MIM 4T1 module FT1 MIM 1T1 F MIM 2T1 F MIM 4T1 F module 1 Backup 2 Terminal access service 3 ISDN PRI MIM 1T1 MIM 2T1 MIM 4T1 module MIM 1T1 panel is similar to that of MIM 1T1 F The following figure shows a MIM 1T1 panel Interface Cable MIM 1T1 MIM 2T1 MIM 4T1 MIM 1T1 F MIM 2T1 F MIM 4T1 F Modules 93 Figure 103 MIM 1T1 panel
148. e cable is an RJ 45 female connector for connecting a TE device Figure 275 Crossover ISDN S T cable Jw TD WT ca Hi CAUTION a f outdoor cabling is involved you need to install a lightning arrester at the input end of the ISDN BRI S T interface cable to avoid lightning strike m When connecting the interface cable pay attention to the mark on the interface to avoid wrong insertion which may damage the interface card or even the router host Step 1 Identify the operating mode of the BSV interface If the interface is to be connected to an ISDN network it should operate in user mode if the interface is to be connected to a TE device such as a digital phone or another BSV interface in user mode the interface should operate in network mode 224 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS FIC 24FXS Introduction Interface Attributes Interface LEDs Step 2 Connect the cable 1 To connect the module to an ISDN network identify the type of the ISDN line provided by your telecommunications service provider a fitis an ISDN U interface line use an NT1 for conversion Insert one end of the S T interface cable into the S T interface on the NT1 and the other end to a BSV interface on the FIC 2BSV FIC 4BSV m If it is an ISDN S T interface line directly connect the cable to a BSV interface on the FIC 2BSV FIC 4BSV
149. e cable is used outdoors it is recommended that users install a special lightning arrester on the input end of the cable in order to avoid the lightning effects more efficiently a One end of the telephone cable has a ferrite core To ensure the compatibility of the Router users should connect the end with the ferrite core to the Router If the SIC is properly installed follow these steps to connect the cable Step 1 Connect the end with the ferrite core to a RJ11 port of SIC FXS SIC FXO Step 2 Insert the other end to a atelephone or fax or the ATO loop trunk if a SIC 1FXS SIC 2FXS is installed m a subscriber line of exchange if a SIC 1FXO SIC 2FXO is installed SIC 4FSW SIC 4FSW PoE and DSIC 9FSW DSIC 9FSW PoE interface cards are 4 9 port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Layer 2 SIC interface cards that can be used on H3C MSR 20 30 50 series routers They provide up to 4 9 10 100 Base Tx Ethernet ports for Layer 2 and Layer 3 switching A router installed with SIC 4FSW DSIC 9FSW modules can work as a switching routing integrated device on a small sized enterprise network to connect PCs and network devices inside the 40 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS Interface Attributes gt Interface LEDs network directly SIC AFSW PoE DSIC OFSW PoE interface cards can supply power to powered devices PDs through power over Ethernet PoE Functions supported by interface cards are as follows m Effective transmission distance of 100 meters w
150. e following table Table 82 Interface attributes of MIM 1VE1 Attribute Description Connector DB 15 Interface LEDs gt Interface Cable MIM 1VE1 Module 123 Table 82 Interface attributes of MIM 1VE1 Attribute Description Number of connectors 1 Operating mode CE1 ISDN PRI R2 Interface rate 2 048 Mbps Cable E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter with BNC connector Supported service 1 R2 signaling 2 DSS1 signaling 3 IP Fax A General VoIP features in Comware MIM 1VE1 panel is shown in the following figure Figure 139 MIM 1VE1 panel a OJ0do992Jo29222222O92I29299292JJO O O O O o 680000000000000 OLINK O O iver OACT cEUPRURZ 1VE1 m O O 03 3 5 fl t Demoodmfn oeo AADA fF The following table describes the LEDs on the MIM 1VE1 panel Table 83 Description of the LEDs on the MIM 1VE1 panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted and received ON means data is being transmitted and received The MIM 1VE1 module is 1U in height occupying two slots MIM 1VE1 interface cables are G 703 compliant 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cables At one end of the cable is a DB 15 male connector for the connection to the Router and at the other end is an RJ 45 connector for the connection to the network 124
151. e impedance is 75 ohm Step 2 Connect the DB 15 connector of E1 cable to SIC 1VE1 Step 3 Connect the other end of the E1 cable to the corresponding network device When the E1 cable is a 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial cable m Directly connect the BNC connector of the cable to the remote equipment if there is no need for extension or m Connect the BNC connector of the cable to the coaxial connector and the other end of the coaxial connector to the remote network equipment through a 75 ohm E1 trunk cable if cable extension is needed CAUTION The wire marked TX in the E1 cable should be connected to the peer wire marked RX and the wire marked RX should be connected to the peer wire marked TX Figure 43 Extending an E1 75 ohm non balanced coaxial cable B 15 NC BNC Network Router N devices E l H such as DDN Coaxial connector 75 ohm E1 trunk cable 75 ohm non balanced coaxial cable SIC 1VT1 Introduction gt Interface Attributes SIC 1VT1 49 If the remote device has 120 ohm interface it is needed to use a 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter or use a 120 ohm cable When the E1 cable is a 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable Directly connect the RJ 45 connector of the cable to the RJ 45 port of the remote equipment if there is no need to extend the E1 cable or Connect the RJ 45 connector of the cable to the network connector and the
152. e invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture of an optical port when no fiber is connected or the dust cap is removed do not stare into the open aperture Replace the dust cap when no fiber is connected to the optical port FIC 2BSV FIC 4BSV Module Introduction The 2 port and 4 port ISDN BRI S T voice interface cards FIC 2BSV and FIC 4BSV can be used to process ISDN voice traffic In the upstream direction it can be connected to user interfaces on an ISDN switch to receive and decompress compress and transmit ISDN BRI digital voice traffic In the downstream direction it can be connected to TE devices to allow their voice traffic to be forwarded through a WAN interface on the router to the Internet thus implementing VolP The interfaces on the FIC 2BSV 4BSV card are ITU T l 430 compliant adopting pseudo ternary coding providing 192 Kbps rate and allowing the maximum transmission distance of 1 km 0 6 mi in point to point mode The FIC 2BSV FIC 4BSV has these features m The BSV interfaces support two modes user and network respectively for connecting an ISDN network and a TE device a When a BSV interface works in network mode traffic is processed as follows The digital voice traffic received on the BSV interface is compressed and forwarded through the CPU on the main control board to a WAN interface The IP voice traffic received on a WAN interface is forwarded through the CPU on the main control board
153. e router Troubleshooting When powering up the device the ACTIVE LED should flashing for two seconds before turning off which indicates the encryption processor of the MIM HNDE module has been configured and is ready for work If the ACTIVE LED stays on when powering up the device this means the initialization of the processor fails and the system bus does not work normally Check the connection between the MIM HNDE module and the host If the connection is good the abnormal status may due to the host or the MIM HNDE module contact our agents for support Symptom 3 The ACTIVE LED stays on or off when the MIM HNDE module is running Troubleshooting The ACTIVE LED should be blinking when the MIM HNDE module runs the encryption service The solid on or off indicates the system bus works abnormally Check the connection between the MIM HNDE module and host If the connection is good the abnormal status may due to the host or the MIM HNDE module contact our agents for support 2 port E1 voice interface module MIM 2VE1 can handle dense voice signals in VoIP system It provides two CE1 PRI R2 ports allowing the access of 60 channels of voice signals 118 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES i gt a VCPM is provided to users together with MIM 2VE1 Users can select VPM module as needed a VPM module is installed on the main board of MIM 2VE1 Interface Attributes The interface attributes of MIM 2VE1 are given in the followin
154. eans a link is present ACTIVE OFF means no data is being transmitted or received ON means data is being transmitted or received The MIM 8E1 MIM 8E1 F module provides eight E1 ports and adopts a 120 ohm or a 75 ohm 8E1 conversion cable The two types of cables look similar Both of them have a DB 68 connector at one end for connecting the router At the other end however the 75 ohm 8E1 conversion cable provides 16 coaxial cable connectors and the 120 ohm 8E1 conversion cable provides eight twisted pair cable connectors as shown in the following figures Figure 101 75 ohm 8E1 conversion cable foi mu y mm om mnr mn Cr p I Y XE YB YB OP Ym OW MOE yo OM a g xi Connecting the Interface Cable N MIM 1T1 MIM 2T1 MIM 4T1 MIM 1T1 F MIM 2T1 F MIM 4T1 F Modules 91 Figure 102 120 ohm 8E1 conversion cable CAUTION Before you connect a port read its label carefully a wrong connection can impair the interface module and even damage the device You are r
155. eck the behavior of the LINK LED on the MIM 1AT3 panel It is OFF when fault has occurred on the link and signal is out of synchronization In this case please check the link MIM 1POS Module Introduction MIM 1POS represents the 1 port SDH SONET interface module It supports interface rates up to 155 52 Mbps STM 1 0C 3 The MIM 1POS can use the protocols such as PPP Frame Relay and HDLC at the data link layer and IP at the network layer It allows direct transmission of packets over SONET SDH It supports Four SFP types multi mode short haul 1310 nm single mode medium haul 1310 nm single mode long haul 1310 nm and single mode ultra long haul 1550 nm um 155 52 Mbps fractional interface Interface Attributes Interface LEDs Interface Cable Connecting the Interface Cable MIM 1POS Module 111 Table 71 Interface attributes of the MIM 1POS Attribute MIM 1POS Connector SFP LC Interface SONET OC 3 SDH STM 1 standard Number of 1 interfaces Interface rate 155 52 Mbps Transmit Type Multi mode Single mode Single mode Single mode ting short haul medium haul long haul ultra long haul optical iin 19 0 dBm 15 0 dBm 5 0 dBm 5 0 dBm power Max 14 0 dBm 8 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm Receiver 30 0 dBm 28 0 dBm 34 0 dBm 34 0 dBm sensitivity Overload optical 14 0 dBm 7 0 dBm 9 0 dBm 10 0 dBm power Central 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm wavelength Fiber type 62 5
156. ecommended to install a special lightning arrester at the input end of the interface cable for better lightning protection Step 1 Choose an 8E1 conversion cable appropriate to the interface type of the peer device a lf the interface impedance of the peer device is 75 ohm use a 75 ohm 8E1 conversion cable a lf the interface impedance of the peer device is 120 ohm use a 120 ohm 8E1 conversion cable Step 2 Insert the DB 68 connector of the cable to the DB 68 port on the MIM 8E1 MIM 8E1 F module and fasten the cable fastening screws Step 3 Identify the sequence number of the other end of the MIM 8E1 MIM 8E1 F conversion cable and connect it with a peer device Step 4 Power on the router Check the behavior of the LINK LED on the module panel It is OFF when fault has occurred on the link and signal is out of synchronization In this case please check the link MIM 1T1 MIM 2T1 MI M 4T1 MIM 1T1 F MI M 2T1 F MIM 4T1 F Modules Introduction MIM 1T1 MIM 2T1 MIM 4T1 module 1 2 4 port channelized T1 PRI interface module MIM 1T1 MIM 2T1 MIM 4T1 serves to transmit receive and handle T1 data streams provide CT1 access and fulfill the function of ISDN PRI Thereby one card can be used for multiple purposes 92 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES gt Interface Attributes Interface LEDs MIM 1T1 F MIM 2T1 F MIM 4T1 F 1 2 4 port fractional T1 interface module MIM 1 2 4T1 F and MIM 1 2 4T1 modul
157. ed in the RJ 45 connectors at both ends are completely the same It is used to connect terminal devices such as PCs routers to Hubs or LAN Switches a Crossover cable The wire sequences of twisted pair cable crimped in the RJ 45 connectors at both ends are different It can be used to connect two terminal devices such as PCs and Routers For the pinouts identification and making methods of these two kinds of network cables see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual CAUTION You should connect a cable to the port with the correct mark Misplugging is prone to impair the interface card and even damage the router If the SIC has been properly installed follow these steps to connect the interface cable Step 1 Connect the Ethernet port of SIC to a PC or router using a crossover cable and to a Hub or LAN Switch using a straight through cable Step 2 Check the status of LINK LED on the panel ON means the link is connected and OFF means the link is not connected In the latter case check the line 42 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS SIC 1GEC Introduction gt Interface Attributes 1 port 10 100 1000 Mbps electrical and fiber Ethernet interface SIC card SIC 1GEC has the following functions m Receipt transmission and processing of GE data stream m CE electrical and fiber interface access m 1000 100 10 Mbps on electrical interface m 1000 Mbps on fiber interface For H3C MSR 20 40 and MSR 30
158. ee eee ee ee ee eee eee ee ee eee eH SI x x x MIM DMIM Purchase Guide 237 Table 178 MIM DMIM options Interface card 20 20 20 40 50 40 type 20 21 20 40 30 11 30 16 30 20 30 60 50 60 MIM 8E1 75 F x x y y V V x MIM 1T1 x x y y y V x MIM 2T1 x x y y y y x MIM 4T1 x x y V y y x MIM 8T1 x x y y y y x MIM 1T1 F x x y V y y x MIM 2T1 F x x y V y V x MIM 4T1 F x x y V y y x MIM 8T1 F x x y y y y x MIM 2FXS x x y V y y x MIM 4FXS x x y V y V x MIM 2FXO x x y V y V x MIM 4FXO x x y V y y x MIM 4BSE x x y V y y x MIM 1CT3 x x y y y y x MIM 1CE3 x x y y y V x MIM HNDE x x y y y V x MIM 1POS x x y y y y x MIM 2EM x x y V y V x MIM 4EM x x y y y V x MIM 1G SHDSL x x y y y V x MIM 1AMM x x y y y y x MIM 1ASL x x y V y y x MIM 1ASM x x y y y y x MIM 1AE3 x x y V y y x MIM 1AT3 x x y V y y x MIM 1CPOS E x x y y y V x MIM 1CPOS T x x y y y y x MIM IMA 4T x x V y y y x MIM IMA 8T x x y y y y x Mi Maat 120 x x y V y y x MIM IMA 4E1 75 x x V Ni Ni x MNES 120 x x y V y y x MIM IMA 8E1 75 x x y y y y x MIM 1SHL 4W x x y y y V x MIM 2BSV x x y y y V x MIM 4BSV x x y y y y x 1 Note that in some regions the OAP modules are sold as OSM modules They are identical in function 238 CHAPTER A INTERFACE CARD AND INTERFACE MODULE PURCHASE GUIDE FIC DFIC Purchase Guide Interface card type Table 179 FIC DFIC options 20 20 20 21 20 40 30 11 30 16 30 20 20 40 30 60 50 40 50 60
159. el is shown in the following figure Interface Cable MIM 2SAE MIM 4SAE MIM 8SAE Module 75 Figure 73 MIM 2SAE panel O LINK osaE O jo 9 O act oSAE ft A h T DATs fh r Ma a Th i AL 4 MIM 4SAE panel is shown in the following figure Figure 74 MIM 4SAE panel Pw 90000090000 im 9200090000000 FA o oo AE O je jeoo6l je ol 1 O 4sAE A Aan A AAA A SN ACT mA hE aT The following table describes the LEDs on the MIM 2SAE MIM 4SAE panel Table 44 Description of the LEDs on the MIM 2SAE MIM 4SAE panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received blinking means data is being received or and transmitted MIM 8SAE panel is shown in the following figure Figure 75 MIM 8SAE panel Os jo ol jod gol jo i sa QOL _J ol eoor Le L__1 0 ge m nee 4 Se eS eave aaa al ae wn 4 On MIM 8SAE module each link corresponds to a LED ON means the link is connected Blinking means data is being transmitted or received SAE modules use synchronous asynchronous serial interface cables with DB 28 connectors for connection Before connecting to a port on 2SAE
160. eld grounding OFF RxShield is AY CAUTION mode selection switch grounded via capacitance ON RxShield is grounded directly m t is recommended to select the DIP switch in this way when connecting 75 ohm cable flip BIT1 8 to ON and when connecting 120 ohm cable flip BIT1 8 to OFF a By default all of the DIP switches are factory configured to ON that is the impedance of E1 interface is 75 ohm The following figure illustrates the SIC 1VE1 panel Interface Cable SIC 1VE1 47 Figure 40 SIC 1VE1 panel 9999999 9999959 v oETPRIRZ The following table describes the LEDs on the SIC 1VE1 panel Table 22 LEDs for the electrical interface on the left of SIC 1GEC panel LED Description LINK ON means carrier signal is received OFF means no carrier signal is received ACT OFF No data is being received and transmitted Blinking Data is being received and transmitted The interface cable of SIC 1VE1 SIC 1E1 F is a standard E1 G 703 which has two types 75 ohm non balanced coaxial cable and 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable The following figure illustrates these two types of cables a 75 ohm non balanced coaxial cable Figure 41 E1 G 703 75 ohm non balanced coaxial cable 75 ohm non balanced coaxial cable connects SIC 1VE1 with the DB 15 connector and the network end with the BNC connector A pair of coaxial connectors is available for extending the E1 cable Both ends of the
161. en received OFF means no carrier signal has been received Blinking means data is being transmitted or and received LP AL ON means the interface is in a loopback Blinking means an AIS LFA or RAI alarm signal is present OFF means no loopback or alarm is present Note AIS Alarm indication signal LFA loss of frame alignment RAI Remote alarm indication Interface cables T1 cables for the FIC T1 FIC T1 F cards are 100 ohm straight through shielded cables as shown in the following figure Figure 217 T1 cable To extend a T1 cable you may connect the cable to another one using a network interface connector with an RJ 45 receptacle at each end Both T1 cable and network interface connector are optional accessories Please order them together with FIC 1T1 FIC 2T1 FIC 4T1 and FIC 1T1 F FIC 2T1 F FIC 4T1 F By default they are not provided CAUTION Before you connect a port read its label carefully a wrong connection can cause damages to the interface card and even the device If outdoor cabling is involved consider to install a special lightning arrester at the input end of the T1 interface cable for better lightning protection Step 1 Insert one end of the T1 cable into the to be connected RJ 45 connector on the card Step 2 Connect the other end of the cable to another device directly if the cable is long enough If not extend the cable before you do that as shown in the following fig
162. ence protocol PLCP a Scrambling in data transmission m Line clock when working as DTE interface and internal clock when working as DCE interface a Four types of test measures local cell loopback local loopback remote payload loopback and remote line loopback i gt You may eguip your router with FIC 1AE3 cards to its full capacity Yet you are recommended to install only one FIC 1AE3 on it whatever its model is to ensure performance of some Key services Interface Attributes The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC 1AE3 Table 129 Interface attributes of the FIC 1AE3 Attribute FIC 1AE3 Connector SMB Number of connectors 2 Interface standard G 703 G 751 G 832 G 823 Interface rate 34 368 Mbps Interface cable E3 T3 cable 75 ohm coaxial cables Supported services ATM traffic CBR constant bit rate rt_VBR variable bit rate real time nrt_VBR variable bit rate non real time UBR unspecified bit rate Interface LEDs The following figure illustrates the FIC 1AE3 panel Figure 227 FIC 1AE3 panel The following table describes the LEDs on the FIC 1AE3 panel 186 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Interface Cable gt Connecting the Interface FIC 1AT3 Cable N Introduction Table 130 LEDs on the FIC 1AE3 panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being tr
163. ending an E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable DB 15 RJ 45 RJ 45 Network devices such Router y as DDN P Network interface connector 120 ohm balanced twisted pair 120 ohm E1 trunk cable Step 4 Check the behavior of the LINK LED on the module panel It is OFF when fault has occurred on the link and signal is out of synchronization In this case please check the link Connecting interface cable of MIM 4E1 MIM 4E1 F Step 1 Select the appropriate 4E1 cable and E1 cable according to type of the port on the remote device and set DIP switches of MIM 4E1 or MIM 4E1 F module correctly m f the resistance of the port on the device to be connected is 75 ohm select a 75 ohm E1 non balanced coaxial cable and a 75 ohm 4E1 conversion cable and set all the DIP switches on the MIM 4E1 MIM 4E1 F module to ON that is the port resistance is 75 ohm a f the resistance of the port on the device to be connected is 120 ohm select a 120 ohm E1 balanced twisted pair cable and a 120 ohm 4E1 conversion cable and set all the DIP switches on the MIM 4E1 MIM 4E1 F module to OFF that is the port resistance is 120 ohm Step 2 Plug the DB 25 connector of the 4E1 conversion cable into a DB 25 port on MIM 4E1 or MIM 4E1 F module and tighten the screws Step 3 Connect the DB 15 connector of the 4E1 conversion cable to the E1 cable making sure of wire seguence of the conne
164. equences of the twisted pairs crimped by RJ 45 connectors at both ends are different It is used for the connection between terminal devices e g PC and router And it can be made by the user For the pinouts of straight through Ethernet cable and crossover Ethernet cable see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual Connecting Ethernet fiber interface cable CAUTION When connecting the optical fiber observe the following a Do not over bend the optical fiber Its curvature radius must be no less than 10 cm 3 9 in a Ensure that the Tx and Rx ends are correctly connected 212 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS A a Ensure that the fiber ends are clean WARNING Laser danger Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the fiber optic ports which are connected to lasers To protect your eyes against radiation harm never stare into an open fiber optic port Step 1 Insert the SFP optical module into its corresponding slot Step 2 Locate the Rx and Tx ports of the GE interface Connect them to another device with two optical fibers Rx to Tx and Tx to Rx Step 3 Check the status of LINK LED on the GE interface ON means the link is connected and OFF means the link is not connected In the latter case check the line Connecting Ethernet electrical cable Step 1 Use a crossover cable for the connection to a PC router and straight through cable to a Hub LAN Switch Plug one end of the cable to an Etherne
165. er device Step 3 Check the behavior of the LINK LED on the MIM 1CE3 panel It is OFF when the line is faulty and signal is out of synchronization In this case check the link MIM 1CT3 Module Introduction 1 port channelized T3 interface module MIM 1CT3 serves to Interface Attributes Interface LEDs MIM 1CT3 Module 99 a Transmit Receive and handle one channel of T3 fast traffic as well as provide the accessing of T3 traffic when working in T3 mode and m Provide the low speed accessing service at the speed of n x 64 kbps or 56 kbps where n is smaller than or equal to 128 when working in CT3 mode T3 represents the tertiary group rate of T system in the TDM system that is 44 736 Mbps A T3 channel can be channelized into 28 T1 lines through the demultiplexing processes of T23 and T12 each T1 line also supporting the operating modes of CT1 T23 is used to indicate either T2 to T3 multiplex or T3 to T2 demultiplex and T12 to indicate T1 to T2 multiplex or T2 to T1 demultiplex T23 and T12 discussed here represent the demultiplex process The interface attributes of MIM 1CT3 are given in the following table Table 58 Interface attributes of MIM 1CT3 Attribute Description Connector SMB Number of connectors 2 Interface standard G 703 G 704 G 752 AT amp T TR 54014 AT amp T TR 62415 ANSI T1 107 Interface rate 44 736 Mbps Interface cable type T3 cable 75 ohm coaxial cable Operating mode T3
166. er of connector 1 Interface standard G 703 G 704 Interface rate 2 048 Mbps Frame format Ethernet_ll Ethernet_SNAP IEEE 802 2 IEEE 802 3 Cable type 75 ohm non balanced coaxial cable 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable Coaxial connector network interface connector and 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter with BNC connector Operation mode CE1 ISDN PRI only supported by SIC 1VE1 R2 Services Backup Terminal access ISDN only supported by SIC 1VE1 DIP Switches CE1 PRI R2 interface is compatible with 75 ohm and 120 ohm impedance Matching of different impedance is implemented through an 8BIT DIP switch By default all the DIP switches are set to ON as illustrated in the following figure Interface LEDs CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS Figure 39 Default setting of DIP switches l i i l l Description of DIP switch settings is given in the following table Table 21 Description of DIP switch settings of SIC ERRI SIC 1E1 F Configuration of Configuration of DIP Description 75 ohm impedance 120 ohm impedance 1BIT 75 ohm 1 20 ohm ON OFF BIT selection switch ON OFF 3BIT ON OFF ABIT ON OFF 5BIT ON OFF 6BIT RxRing grounding OFF RxRing is mode selection grounded via switch capacitance ON RxRing is grounded directly 7BIT RxShield grounding ON RxShield is mode selection grounded switch OFF RxShield is not grounded 8BIT SxShi
167. erface gt Interface Attributes Interface LEDs Interface Cable FIC 1AT3 187 m Four types of test measures local cell loopback local loopback remote payload loopback and remote line loopback You may equip your router with FIC 1AT3 cards to its full capacity Yet you are recommended to install only one FIC 1AT3 on it whatever its model is to ensure performance of some key services The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC 1AT3 Table 131 Interface attributes of the FIC 1AT3 Attribute FIC 1AT3 Connector SMB Number of connectors 2 Interface standard G 703 G 704 G 823 Interface rate 44 736 Mbps Interface cable E3 T3 cable 75 ohm coaxial cables Supported services ATM Traffic CBR rt_VBR nrt_VBR UBR The following figure illustrates the FIC 1AT3 panel Figure 229 FIC 1AT3 panel G 1AT3 The following table describes the LEDs on the FIC 1AT3 panel Table 132 LEDs on the FIC 1AT3 panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received blinking means data is being received or and transmitted The interface that the FIC 1AT3 provides uses two SMB sockets for data transmitting and receiving respectively The ports adopt the 75 ohm unbalanced transmission mode and are connected to the peer device using a pair of 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial cables as shown in Figur
168. erface Attributes gt Interface LEDs 1 port 44 736 Mbps ATM T3 interface module MIM 1AT3 supports a Two ATM cell mapping modes ADM and PLCP a Scrambling in data transmission a Both line clock when working as DTE interface and internal clock when working as DCE interface m Four types of test measures i e local cell loopback local payload loopback remote payload loopback and remote line loopback You are allowed to equip an H3C Series Router with MIM AT3 modules to its full capacity Yet you are recommended to install only one MIM AT3 module on it whatever its model is to ensure the performance of some key services The interface attributes of MIM 1AT3 are given in the following table Table 69 Interface attributes of MIM 1AT3 module Attribute 1AT3 Module Connector SMB Connector number 2 Interface standard G 703 G 704 G 823 Interface rate 44 736 Mbps Cable E3 T3 cable 75 ohm coaxial cables Supported service ATM Traffic CBR rt_VBR nrt_VBR UBR In the supported services described in the above table CBR represents Constant Bit Rate rt_VBR represents Variable Bit Rate Real Time nrt_VBR represents Variable Bit Rate Non Real Time and UBR represents Unspecified Bit Rate MIM 1AT3 panel is shown in the following figure Figure 122 MIM 1AT3 panel cle laleleslelelelelelelele ele lelelelelelelelele LINK l 4ATa O ACT ft A fr ATS The following ta
169. es You can distinguish between them by the main label text 4E1 120ohm CAB for the 120 ohm 4E1 adapter cable and 4E1 75ohm CAB for the 75 ohm 4E1 adapter cable As shown in the following two figures both cables look similar except that the 75 ohm 4E1 adapter cable uses eight coaxial cables but the 120 ohm 4E1 adapter cable uses four twisted pair cables Figure 202 120 ohm 4E1 adapter cable 166 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Internal DIP Switch Figure 203 75 ohm 4E1 adapter cable 1 Ir 1 yT u IT Ur IT X4 B x3 x2 xi aa bem Both 75 ohm 4E1 and 120 ohm 4E1 adapter cables are required for FIC 4E1 FIC 4E1 F But E1 cables are optional and please order together with FIC 4E1 FIC 4E1 F by default they are not provided In addition you are available with 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapters The FIC E1 and the FIC E1 F cards provide internal DIP switches the setting of which decides interface impedance and the grounding mode Table 114 DIP switches and E1 interfaces of the FIC E1 FIC E1 F cards FIC 1E1 F Card IC 1E1 F _ FIC 2E1 FIC 2E1 F FIC 4E1 FIC 4E1 F DIPswitch S1 S1 S2 S1 S2 S3 S4 Controlle Interface Inte
170. eters 328 1 ft when connected with a category 5 twisted pair cable crossover or straight through cable a 100 Mbps wire speed forwarding between any ports when connected with a category 5 twisted pair cable crossover or straight through cable a Auto sensing at a rate of 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps a Full duplex and half duplex of which full duplex is common Table 100 Interface attributes of XMIM 16FSW XMIM 24FSW Attributes XMIM 16FSW XMIM 24FSW Connector type RJ45 Interface type MDI MDIX 144 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES gt Interface LEDs gt Interface Cable Table 100 Interface attributes of XMIM 16FSW XMIM 24FSW Attributes XMIM 16FSW XMIM 24FSW Number of 16 x 100 Mbps RJ45 connector 24 x 100 Mbps RJ45 connector connectors Cable type Standard straight through Ethernet cable crossover Ethernet cable Operation mode Auto sensing 10M 100 Mbps full duplex half duplex Ethernet interfaces on network adapters are usually medium dependent interfaces MDIs Cross medium dependent interfaces MDIXs are another type of Ethernet interfaces which are usually used on hubs and LAN Switches Figure 165 shows the XMIM 16FSW panel Figure 165 XMIM 16FSW panel EN Green Link Yellow Active vo iA V2 BA V4 B V
171. face blinking means data is being transmitted and or received The external interface provided by the FIC 1CE3 uses two SMB sockets respectively for data transmitting Tx and data receiving Rx The interface transmits in 75 ohm unbalanced mode and uses a pair of 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial cables to connect another device Figure 222 E3 T3 cable BNC connector SMB connector The FIC 1CE3 and the FIC 1CT3 use the same cable called E3 T3 cable in this manual The standard eguipping package of the FIC 1CE3 does not include the interface cable CAUTION By design the FIC 1CE3 is protected against lightning strikes But when outdoor cabling is involved you are recommended to add a special lightning arrester at the input end of the E3 T3 cable for better protection 180 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS FIC 1CT3 Introduction Interface Attributes Interface LEDs Step 1 Connect the SMB connector of an E3 T3 cable to the Tx port on the FIC 1CE3 and the other end to the Rx port on another device Step 2 Connect the SMB connector of another E3 T3 cable to the Rx port on the FIC 1CE3 and the other end to the Tx port on another device Step 3 Power on the router and check the behavior of the LINK LED on the FIC 1CE3 panel OFF means fault occurs on the line and the signal is not synchronized Check the line status FIC 1CT3 the 1 port channelized T3 interface card delivers these functions m In T3 mode transmitting re
172. face card Step 2 Connect the other end of the cable as follows m For an FIC FXS card connect to a phone set fax or ATO loop trunk of telephone exchange m For an FIC FXS connect to a regular subscriber line of telephone exchange a For an E amp M card connect to an E amp M trunk on the telephone exchange FIC HNDE Introduction FIC HNDE the high network data encryption card delivers IPSec and hardware based IP packet encryption It supports multiple hardware encryption decryption and hash algorithms thus providing encryption with high performance and reliability The FIC HNDE is intended for low end and mid range modular routers Installed with an FIC HNDE the main board of your router can implement VPN with encryption provided by the FIC HNDE in addition to IP packet forwarding 198 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Interface Features Panel and LEDs The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC HNDE Table 142 Interface attributes of the FIC HNDE Attribute Protocol supported Hardware algorithm Description IPSec key algorithm DES 3DES AES Authentication algorithm HMAC MD5 96 HMAC SHA 1 96 The following figure illustrates the FIC HNDE panel Figure 243 FIC HNDE panel High Mark Data Enerypation O O Stans O ACTIVE a NDE C HNDE The following table describes the LEDs on the FIC HNDE panel Table 143 LEDs on the FIC HNDE LED
173. fractional E1 interface card FIC 2E1 F 4 port fractional E1 interface card FIC 4E1 F 8 port fractional E1 interface card FIC 8E1 F 1 port channelized T3 interface card FIC 1CT3 1 port channelized E3 interface card FIC 1CE3 1 port ATM 155 Mbps multi mode fiber interface card FIC 1 ATM OC3MM 1 port ATM 155 Mbps single mode fiber interface card FIC 1 ATM OC3SM 1 port ATM 155 Mbps single mode long haul fiber interface card FIC 1ATM OC3SML 1 port 34 Mbps ATM E3 interface card FIC 1AE3 1 port 44 Mbps ATM T3 interface card FIC 1AT3 1 port G SHDSL interface card FIC 1G SHDSL 1 port dual pair G SHDSL interface card FIC 1SHL 4W 8 port E1 ATM inverse multiplexing interface card FIC IMA 8E1 4 port E1 ATM inverse multiplexing interface card FIC IMA 4E 1 8 port T1 ATM inverse multiplexing interface card FIC IMA 8T 1 4 port T1 ATM inverse multiplexing interface card FIC IMA 4T 1 1 port channelized SDH SONET interface card FIC 1CPOS E 1 port channelized SDH SONET interface card FIC 1CPOS T 1 port SDH SONET interface card FIC 1POS Voice interface cards Encryption cards SIC MIMI FIC Purchase Guideline 15 2 port voice subscriber circuit interface card FIC 2FXS 2 port voice ATO analog trunk interface card FIC 2FXO 2 port voice E amp M analog trunk interface card FIC 2E amp M 4 port voice subscriber circuit interface card FIC 4FXS 4 port voice ATO analog trunk interface card FIC 4FXO 4 port voic
174. g table Table 78 Interface attributes of MIM 2VE1 Attribute Description Connector DB 15 Number of connectors 2 Operating mode CE1 ISDN PRI R2 Interface rate 2 048 Mbps Cable E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable 75ohm to 1200hm adapter Supported service 1 R2 signaling 2 DSS1 signaling 3 IP Fax A General VoIP features in Comware Interface LEDs MIM 2VE1 panel is shown in the following figure Figure 133 MIM 2VE1 panel eco OO GG lee elelelelelol sm o o O O o aeooooooooooooo OLINK Onno LINKO 5 NEI aa CEUPRIR2 ATO we ja es a S The following table describes the LEDs on the MIM 2VE1 panel Table 79 Description of the LEDs on the MIM 2VE1 panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACTIVE OFF means no data is being transmitted or received Blinking means there is data being transmitted or received i gt The MIM 2VE1 module is 1U in height occupying two slots Interface Cable Connecting the Interface Cable MIM 2VE1 Module 119 MIM 2VE1 interface cables are G 703 compliant 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cables At one end of the cable is a DB 15 male connector for the connection to the Router and at the other end is an RJ 45 connector for the connection to the network Figure 134 E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable o a8
175. gative power supply 2 E M 3 RINGO RINGO 4 RING 1 RING 1 5 TIP1 TIP1 6 TIPO TIPO 7 M E Connecting the Interface Cable N FIC HNDE 197 Table 141 Pinouts of E amp M interface cable Bell V 4 wire Router side i Signal at switch side Bell V RJ 45 Pin Signal 4 wire 8 SG negative power supply ground a Because it is hard to know the type of the switch to be connected and the connectors used by the switch you need to make interface cables for connecting the FIC 2E amp M FIC 4E amp M card on site a To ensure the EMC of the router install a ferrite core near the connector of the self made E amp M interface cable by the router side CAUTION a f outdoor cabling is involved consider to install a special lightning arrester at the input end of the interface cable for better lightning protection a Before you connect a port read its label carefully a wrong connection can cause damages to the interface card and even the device a According to Bell V cables for FXS FXO E amp M cards do not provide a PGND wire For this reason a loop should be formed through the earth ground between the router and the connected switch In practice the PGND wire of the switch can be connected to the chassis of the router a n connecting an interface cable note to connect the end with ferrite core to the router for EMC sake Step 1 Insert the ferrite core end of the cable into the to be connected RJ 45 port on the inter
176. ging the interface cable connected to the SIC 1SAE card power off the router Online insertion or removal tends to damage the port and even the device a Before connecting the SIC 1SAE card to a remote device identify the type of the device such as its synchronous asynchronous mode and DTE DCE mode and the signaling criterion baud rate and time clock required by the access device 28 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS Step 1 Choose a synchronous asynchronous serial interface cable depending on the type of the interface on the remote device Step 2 Plug the DB 28 connector of the cable to the DB 28 port on the SIC 1SAE Step 3 Connect the other end of the SAE cable to m Port of CSU DSU if the WAN is a DDN line m Serial port on an analog modem if the WAN is a dial up line Step 4 Check the behavior of the LINK LED on the card panel It is OFF when the line is faulty and signal is out of synchronization Check the line for the cause SIC 1EPRI SIC 1E1 F Introduction Interface Attributes 1 port channelized E1 CE1 PRI compatible interface card SIC 1EPRI supports a Transmission Receiving and handling of E1 data streams m CE1 channelized E1 access a ISDN PRI function a Remote loopback and local loopback functions facilitating fault test and location It is possible to use the card for multiple purposes through different configurations Following are the differences between SIC 1EPRI and 1 port Fractional E1
177. gle mode maximum transmission of 2 km 1 2 mi fiber of 15 km 9 32 optical fiber of 30 distance transmission distance mi transmission km 18 6 mi distance transmission distance Transmitter LED Laser Laser Transmission optical Min 21 dBm Min 15 dBm Min 5 dBm poet Max 14 dBm Max 8 dBm Max 0 dBm Receiver sensitivity Min 28 dBm Min 30 dBm Min 34 dBm Max 8 dBm Max 14 dBm Max 10 dBm Central wavelength 1310 nm ATM Traffic CBR Constant Bit Rate rt_VBR Variable Bit Rate Real Time nrt_VBR Variable Bit Rate Non Real Time UBR Unspecified Bit Rate Service MIM 1AMM MIM 1ASM MIM 1ASL module panels are shown in the following figures Figure 117 MIM 1AMM panel TX Rx LINK CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT acer 1ATM OC3MM ft A fh t A n Figure 118 MIM 1ASM panel CS60C00008 x X erelo ew lola lame O UNK CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT GS act 1ATM OC39M Al Fim h A J Figure 119 MIM 1ASL panel 5Co na m OOOCOGOOOCO LINK CLASS LASER FRODUET G AGT 1ATM OC3SML lt Bfe gi TIN A T1 The following table describes the LEDs on the panels Table 66 Description of the LEDs on the MIM 1AMM MIM 1ASM MIM 1ASL panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or
178. he MIM 1CPOS module can only be connected with an optical fiber cable with an LC type fiber optic connector Figure 161 LC type fiber optic connector Fiber optic connectors according to ITU are passive components used to stably but not permanently connect two or more optical fibers They are indispensable to a fiber optic communications system in the sense that it allows add drop connections between optical channels There are many types of fiber optic connectors such as a FC round fiber optic connector with screw thread Connecting the Interface Optical Fiber AN MIM 1SHL 4W Module 141 a ST round plug in fiber optic connector a LC square fiber optic connector a MT RJ square fiber optic transceiver connector Step 1 Insert the SFP module into the corresponding slot Step 2 Locate the Rx and Tx optic interfaces on the module Use two fiber cables to connect the MIM 1CPOS to the peer device Rx to Tx and Tx to Rx Step 3 Check the status of the LINK LED for the MIM 1CPOS module ON means the Rx link is present and OFF means the opposite In the latter case check the line WARNING Because invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture of an optical port when no fiber is connected or the dust cap is removed do not stare into the open aperture Replace the dust cap when no fiber is connected to the optical port MIM 1SHL 4W Module Introduction Interface Attributes The 1 port dual pair G SHDS
179. he SIC 1ADSL delivers these features 52 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS a Manual ADSL line activation and deactivation providing a convenient fault location means a Interface standards of G DMT G Lite and T1 413 auto sensing m Trellis coding except for G Lite on ADSL interfaces enhancing the stability of ADSL connection P gt For H3C MSR 20 40 and MSR 30 50 series routers a SIC 1ADSL interface card can only be installed in SLOT2 or SLOTA Interface Attributes Table 25 Interface attributes of the SIC 1ADSL Attribute SIC 1ADSL Connector RJ 11 Number of connectors 1 Interface rate a In ADSL full rate mode ITU T 992 1 G DMT ANSI T1 413 8 Mbps downlink rate 1024 kbps uplink rate a In ADSL Lite mode ITU T 992 2 G Lite 64 kbps to 1 Mbps downlink rate 64 kbps to 512 kbps uplink rate a In ADSL2 full rate mode ITU T 992 5 24 Mbps downlink rate 1024 kbps uplink rate Interface standard ITU T 992 1 G DMT ITU T 992 2 G Lite ANSI T1 413 Issue 2 ITU T 992 3 ITU T 992 5 Cable Telephone cable Supported service ADSL over the regular telephone line Interface LEDs The following figure illustrates the SIC 1ADSL panel Figure 47 SIC 1ADSL panel ERA EA A r ny MM NA O LINK O act SIC po Bee eee Ml The following tab
180. he following table describes the LEDs on the MIM 1CE3 panel 98 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES Interface Cable gt Connecting the Interface Cable N Table 57 Description of the LEDs on the MIM 1CE3 panel LED Description LINK OFF means the link is not set up ON means the link has been set up ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received blinking means data is being received or and transmitted The external interface provided by a MIM 1CE3 module is two SMB sockets respectively for Tx Transmitter end and Rx Receiver end The interface adopts 75ohm unbalanced transmission mode and uses a pair of 750hm unbalanced coaxial cables to connect the peer device Figure 111 E3 T3 cable onnector connector UM a MIM 1CE3 and 1CT3 adopt the same cable which is called E3 T3 cable in this manual a The standard shipment package of MIM 1CE3 does not include the interface cable CAUTION Some measures have been taken to protect the MIM 1CE3 module To achieve better lightning protection effects however you are recommended to add a special lightning arrester at the input end of the E3 or T3 cable when it is led outdoors Step 1 Connect the SMB connector of an E3 or T3 cable to the Tx port of MIM 1CE3 and another end to the Rx port of the device to be connected Step 2 Connect the SMB connector of another E3 or T3 cable to the Rx port of MIM 1CE3 and another end to the Tx port of the pe
181. he place where it is defined in the text Identify menu names menu commands and software button names Examples From the Help menu select Contents Click OK Boldface type is used to highlight command names For example Use the display user interface command to Related Documentation The following manuals offer additional information necessary for managing your MSR 20 30 50 Series router a H3C MSR 20 30 50 Series Routers Installation Manuals Covers setting up and initializing your router a H3C MSR 20 30 50 Series Routers Configuration Guide Describes how to operate the router It includes sections about getting started system management interface link layer protocol network protocol routing protocol multicast protocol security VPN reliability QoS dial up and VolP as well as acronyms used in the manual a H3C MSR 20 30 50 Series Routers Command Reference Guide Provides a detailed description of the operating commands It includes sections about getting started system management interface link layer protocol network protocol routing protocol multicast protocol security VPN reliability OoS dial up and VolP as well as a command index a LMR Series Routers Cable Manual Describes the pinouts of the cables available for LMR series routers a Release Notes Contains the latest information about your product If information in this guide differs from information in the relea
182. he power cord Step 3 Select a slot and insert the MIM along the guides in the slot until it contacts the rear panel of the Router 18 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW Installing Removing a FIC A Step 4 Fix the MIM into the Router with captive screws Step 5 Power on the Router and check the LEDs of the corresponding slot on the front panel ON means that the MIM is operating normally and OFF means that the POST of the MIM has failed In the latter case please contact your agent Figure 3 Installing a MIM 1 Removing a MIM Follow these steps to remove a MIM Step 1 Place the rear panel of the Router towards you Step 2 Turn off the power switch of the Router and unplug the power cord Step 3 Unplug all interface cables from the rear panel of the Router Step 4 Loosen the captive screws at both sides of the MIM Step 5 Pull the MIM towards you until it is completely separated from the bottom of the router CAUTION The EMI gaskets on the FIC panel can filter electromagnetic interference of the router Do not damage them when uninstalling or replacing an FIC If you do not install a new FIC after removing the old one replace the blank filter panel to keep off the dust and ensure adequate ventilation of the router Troubleshooting 19 The MSR 50 series supports hot swapping Thus you can remove or install FICs when the router is running without disconnecting the power supply But before that you must first execute the
183. her end of the 4E1 8E1 conversion cable and connect one connector or a pair of connectors to the peer device FIC IMA 4T1 FIC IMA 8T1 215 Step 4 Power on the router Check the behavior of the LINK LED for the slot on the card panel OFF means the line has problem and signal is out of synchronization Check the link status FIC IMA 4T 1 FIC IMA 8 T1 Introduction Interface Attributes Interface LEDs The 4 port 8 port T1 ATM inverse multiplexing interface card FIC IMA 4T 1 FIC IMA 8T1 provides four eight T1 interfaces that support the IMA technology Their network application is similar to that of the FIC IMA 4E 1 FIC IMA 8E1 card The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC IMA 4T 1 FIC IMA 8T 1 Table 159 Interface attributes of the FIC IMA 4T 1 FIC IMA 8T1 Description Attribute FIC IMA 4T1 FIC IMA 8T1 Connector DB 68 Number of 1 connectors Interface standard Cable type ITU G 703 ITU G 704 4T1 conversion cable 100 ohm straight through shielded 8T1 conversion cable 100 ohm straight through shielded Max transmission distance 150 m 492 1 ft Operating mode Supported service ATM T1 independent link IMA bundle mode AAL5 Protocol Transmission rate PPPoA PPPOEOA IPoA IPoEoA CBR VBR rt VBR nrt UBR The following figures illustrate the FIC IMA 4T1 and FIC IMA 8T1 panels Figure 263 FIC IMA 4T1 panel 216 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE
184. hoi i o 178 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Connecting the Interface Cable N At one end of the cable is a DB 68 connector for connecting the router and at the other end are eight RJ 45 connectors for connecting other devices CAUTION Before you connect a port read its label carefully a wrong connection can impair the interface card and even damage the device If the interface cable is routed outdoors you are recommended to install a special lightning arrester at the input end of the interface cable for better lightning protection Step 1 Insert the DB 68 connector of the 8T1 conversion cable to the DB 68 port on the FIC 8T1 FIC 8T1 F card Step 2 Connect one RJ 45 connector at the other end of the cable to the device to be connected Step 3 Power on the router Check the behavior of the LINK LED on the card panel OFF means fault occurs on the line Check the line status FIC 1CE3 Introduction Interface Attributes FIC 1CE3 the 1 port channelized E3 interface card delivers these functions m In E3 mode transmitting receiving and processing one channel of E3 fast
185. ibute MIM IMA 4T1 MIM IMA 8T1 Connector DB68 Number of connectors 1 Interface standard ITU G 703 ITU G 704 Cable type 4T1 conversion cable 8T1 conversion cable 100 ohm straight through 100 ohm shielded straight through shielded Max transmission distance 150 m 492 1 ft Operating mode ATM T1 independent link lMA bundle mode Supported service AAL5 Protocol PPPoA PPPoEoA IPoA IPoEoA Transmission rate CBR VBR rt VBR nrt UBR The following figures illustrate the MIM IMA 4T1 and MIM IMA 8T1 panels Figure 152 MIM IMA 4T1 panel Interface Cable Connecting the Interface Cable MIM IMA 4T1 MIM IMA 8T1 Module 135 Figure 153 MIM IMA 8T1 panel LEDs on MIM IMA 4T1 and MIM IMA 8T1 panels have the same meanings which are described in the following table Table 93 Description of the LEDs on the MIM IMA 4T1 MIM IMA 8T1 panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received ON means data is being transmitted or received The following figure illustrates an 8T1 conversion cable Figure 154 8T1 conversion cable JA gmmg Push AE Pos a 5
186. ibutes of the FIC 2FXS FIC 2FXO FIC 2E amp M and the FIC 4FXS FIC 4FXO FIC 4E amp M Table 139 Interface attributes of the FIC 2FXS FIC 2FXO FIC 2E amp M and the FIC 4FXS FIC 4FXO FIC 4E amp M Attribute Description Connector RJ 45 Number of connectors 2 FIC 2FXS FIC 2FXO FIC 2E amp M 4 FIC 4FXS FIC 4FXO FIC 4E amp M Cable Telephone cable with ferrite core E amp M trunk cable only for E amp M cards made on site 194 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Interface LEDs Table 139 Interface attributes of the FIC 2FXS FIC 2FXO FIC 2E amp M and the FIC AFXS FIC 4FXO FIC 4E amp M Attribute Description Interface standard ITU Q 512 compliant subscriber circuit interface FIC 2FXS FIC 4FXS ITU Q 552 compliant loop trunk interface FIC 2FXO FIC 4FXO G 712 compliant E amp M trunk interface FIC 2E amp M FIC 4E amp M E amp M interface supporting Bell type Il lll and V using both two wire and four wire implementations ITU K 20 compliant overcurrent protection Dial up mode Dual tone multifreguency DTMF compliant with GB3378 Pulse dial is not available Bandwidth 300 Hz to 3400 Hz The following figure illustrates the FIC 2FXS panel Figure 235 FIC 2FXS panel cC ES COLON The following figure illustrates the FIC 2FXO panel Figure 236 FIC 2FXO panel O ane a e mol AT O GR ge mo EE En 7 aa COE TOT
187. ice traffic to be forwarded through a WAN interface on the router to the Internet thus implementing VoIP The interfaces on the MIM 2BSV MIM 4BSV module are ITU T I 430 compliant adopting pseudo ternary coding providing 192 Kbps rate and allowing the maximum transmission distance of 1 km 0 6 mi in point to point mode MIM 2BSV MIM 4BSV has the following features m The BSV interfaces support two modes user and network respectively for connecting an ISDN network and a TE device a When a BSV interface works in network mode traffic is processed as follows The digital voice traffic received on the BSV interface is compressed and forwarded through the CPU on the main control board to a WAN interface The IP voice traffic received on a WAN interface is forwarded through the CPU on the main control board to MIM 2BSV MIM 4BSV where the traffic is decompressed and sent to the TE device a When a BSV interface works in user mode traffic is processed as follows The digital voice traffic received from the B channels on the BSV interface is decompressed and forwarded through the CPU on the main control board to a local FXS or FXO analog voice interface The voice signals received on the local FXS or FXO analog voice interface are processed by VolP and forwarded through the CPU on the main control board to the MIM 2BSV MIM 4BSV module where the traffic is compressed and sent out of the BSV interface to the connected ISDN switch m Working in con
188. ii a X 21 DTE cable Figure 12 X 21 DTE cable A 3 Pos 28 Pos 15 Os Y Y m X 21 DCE cable Figure 13 X 21 DCE cable A B Poss Pos e is ee W e f n A B sE Di Pos Pos 28 X2 Y a RS449 DTE cable Figure 14 RS449 DTE cable B A jrn Pos 28 pa E Pos YI m RS449 DCE cable gt Connecting the Interface Cable SIC 1SAE 27 Figure 15 RS449 DCE cable gt in Fr e UU a n TT a RS530 DTE cable Figure 16 RS530 DTE cable A X2 m RS530 DCE cable Figure 17 RS530 DCE cable a X1 For the pinouts of synchronous asynchronous serial cables with DB 28 connectors see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual These cables are optional items Please select one when purchasing a SIC 1SAE card by default the cable is not provided WARNING a Before plugging or unplug
189. interface card SIC 1E1 F m FE1 mode of SIC 1E1 F can support only one channel bundle the rate is n x 64kbps n 1 31 while the 31 channels can be grouped into multiple arbitrary bundles by SIC 1EPRI m SIC 1E1 F does not support PRI mode The interface attributes of SIC 1EPRI SIC 1E1 F are given in the following table Table 5 Interface attributes of SIC 1EPRI SIC 1E1 F Attribute Description Connector type DB 15 Number of connectors 1 Interface standard G 703 G 704 Interface rate 2 048 Mbps Cable type 75 ohm non balanced coaxial cable DB 15 to BNC 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable DB 15 to RJ 45 Coaxial connector network interface connector and 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter DIP Switch SIC 1EPRI SIC 1E1 F 29 Table 5 Interface attributes of SIC 1EPRI SIC 1E1 F Attribute Description Operating mode E1 CE1 ISDN PRI supported by SIC 1EPRI only FE1 supported by SIC 1E1 F only Supported service Backup Terminal access ISDN supported by SIC 1EPRI only E1 CE1 PRI interface is compatible with both 75 ohm impedance and 120 ohm impedance The interface matches different types of impedance through an 8BIT DIP switch By default all the 8 positions of the DIP switch are ON as shown in the following figure Figure 18 Default setting of the DIP switches 5 A Pe 8BIT description and settings of DIP switch are given in the fol
190. interface card Use two fibers to connect the FIC 1POS to another device Rx to Tx and Tx to Rx Step 3 Power on the device and check the LINK LED on the FIC 1POS panel ON means the Rx link is present and OFF means the opposite In the latter case check the line status WARNING Because invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture of an optical port when no fiber is connected or the dust cap is removed do not stare into the open aperture Replace the dust cap when no fiber is connected to the optical port FIC 2FXS FIC 2FXO FIC 2E amp M and FIC 4FXS FIC 4FXO FIC 4E amp M Introduction A Interface Attributes FIC 2FXS FIC 4FXS the 2 4 port voice subscriber circuit interface card processes and transmits over data communications networks voice signals for 2 4 regular analog phones faxes or ATO loop trunks of telephone exchanges FIC 2FXO FIC 4FXO the 2 4 port voice ATO analog trunk interface card processes and transmits over data communications networks voice signals for 2 4 loops of telephone exchanges FIC 2E amp M FIC 4E amp M the 2 4 port voice E amp M analog trunk interface card provides and transmits over data communications networks voice signals for 2 4 E amp M analog trunks CAUTION When connecting the FIC 2FXS FIC 2FXO FIC 2E amp M or the FIC 4FXS FIC 4FXO FIC 4E amp M make sure your router has access to an IP network or some other WAN The following table describes the interface attr
191. ional E1 interface card SIC 1E1 F 1 port T1 CT1 PRI compatible interface card SIC 1TPRI 1 port fractional T1 interface card SIC 1T1 F 1 port analog modem interface card SIC 1AM 2 port analog modem interface card SIC 2AM 1 port ADSL interface card SIC 1ADSL 1 port ADSL over ISDN interface card SIC 1ADSL l 10 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW Voice interface cards MIM DMIM XMIM Ethernet modules 1 port ISDN BRI S T interface card SIC 1BS 2 port ISDN BRI S T interface card SIC 2BS 1 port ISDN BRI U interface card SIC 1BU 2 port ISDN BRI U interface card SIC 2BU 1 port voice subscriber circuit interface card SIC 1FXS 2 port voice subscriber circuit interface card SIC 2FXS 1 port voice ATO analog trunk interface card SIC 1FXO 2 port voice ATO analog trunk interface card SIC 2FXO 1 port CE1 PRI R2 compatible interface card SIC 1VE1 1 port CT1 PRI compatible interface card SIC 1VT1 1 port ISDN BRI S T voice interface card SIC 1BSV 2 port ISDN BRI S T voice interface card SIC 2BSV H3C MSR 30 series routers provide MIM slots and support the following MIM DMIM XMIM 1 port 10Base T 100Base TX Fast Ethernet interface module MIM 1FE 2 port 10Base T 100Base TX Fast Ethernet interface module MIM 2FE 4 port 10Base T 100Base TX Fast Ethernet interface module MIM 4FE 1 port 10Base T 100Base TX 1000Base T Ethernet electrical interface module MIM 1GBE 2 port 10Base T 100Base TX 1000Base T Ethernet electri
192. is being received or and transmitted The MIM 1G SHDSL module uses regular telephone cables for connection Telephone cables have been included in the standard shipment package of MIM 1G SHDSL You only need a telephone cable to connect one port on a G SHDSL module to the PSTN network By far the following ATM modules are available for the routers a 1 port ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode 155 Mbps multimode fiber interface module MIM 1AMM a 1 port ATM 155 Mbps single mode fiber interface module MIM 1ASM a 1 port ATM 155 Mbps single mode long haul fiber interface module MIM 1ASL These ATM modules function in the system to provide ATM interfaces for routers supporting a Two frame formats SDH STM 1 and SONET OC 3 a Scrambling in data transmission a Both line clock when working as DTE interface and internal clock when working as DCE interface a Local cell loopback local payload loopback and remote loopback Table 65 Interface attributes of MIM 1AMM MIM 1ASM MIM 1ASL MIM 1ASL Attribute MIM 1AMM module MIM 1ASM module module Optical fiber connector SC Number of ports 1 Interface standard SONET OC 3 SDH STM 1 Interface rate 155 Mbps 106 Interface LEDs CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES Table 65 Interface attributes of MIM 1AMM MIM 1ASM MIM 1ASL MIM 1ASL Attribute MIM 1AMM module MIM 1ASM module module Cable type and the Multimode optical fiber Single mode optical Sin
193. ith category 5 twisted pair cables both crossover and straight through a Effective transmission distance of 100 meters between any interfaces with category 5 twisted pair cables both crossover and straight through m Operating speeds of both 100 Mbps and 10 Mbps and autosensing a Both full duplex in common use and half duplex operating modes Table 14 Interface attributes of the SIC 4FSW SIC 4FSW PoE DSIC 9FSW DSIC 9FSW PoE Description SIC 4FSW SIC 4FSW PoE DSIC 9FSW DSIC 9FSW PoE interface card Attribute interface card Connector RJ 45 Interface type MDI MDIX Number of Four 100 Mbps RJ45 connectors Nine 100 Mbps RJ45 connectors connectors Cable Standard straight through cross over Ethernet cable Operation mode 10 100 Mbps autosensing full half duplex MDI stands for Media Dependent Interface of the Ethernet Normally the interfaces on the network cards belong to this type MDIX stands for Cross Media Dependent Interface which is usually adopted on HUBs or LAN Switches The following figure illustrates the SIC 4FSW SIC 4FSW PoE panel Figure 34 SIC 4FSW SIC 4FSW PoE panel xr J SIC
194. junction with the FXS or FXO analog voice interface modules MIM 2BSV MIM 4BSV provides flexibility in voice call routing m The signaling on the ISDN BRI D channel is processed separately on CPU m The BSV interfaces support remote power supply and thus can be directly connected to ISDN phones a MIM 2BSV MIM 4BSV is dedicated to voice applications which is different from the BS interface cards where BRI data applications are supported Table 94 Interface attributes of MIM 2BSV MIM 4BSV Attribute MIM 2BSV module MIM 4BSV module Connector RJ45 Number of connectors 2 4 Interface standard ITU T 1 430 O 921 O 931 Interface LEDs Interface Cable MIM 2BSV MIM 4BSV Module 137 Table 94 Interface attributes of MIM 2BSV MIM 4BSV Attribute MIM 2BSV module MIM 4BSV module Interface rate 192 Kbps Cable ISDN S interface cable Supported service Voice access over ISDN S interface cable The following figure illustrates the MIM 2BSV panel Figure 155 MIM 2BSV panel O O Grea ace ere ee o L J un _ MM u O AcT 2BSV E OG i ANAG E The following figure illustrates the MIM 4BSV panel Figure 156 MIM 4BSV panel I 1 I 55665 if l I G J o J Lld OUNKO Ll M _ L u Oacr
195. king means one or more links are occupied links are occupied Link Steady ON if an electric device Steady ON means no fault is connected occurs on the link The following figure illustrates the DFIC 24FXO24FXS panel Figure 278 DFIC 24FXO24FXS front panel DFIC 24FXO24FXS uses a 5 m 16 4 ft or 15 m 49 2 ft telephone conversion cable At one end of the cable is a D50 male connector that is used to connect to the DFIC 24FXO24FXS card at the other end are 24 RJ11 connectors Connecting the Interface Cable DFIC 24FXO24FXS 227 cm o E o N N wo DFIC 24FXO24FXS conversion cable Ih noe vp m gt o m 1i i re i i FU rr is it i i is FF fe i is 1E 5 is Based on the actual needs the RJ11 connectors of the FXS interface conversion cable can be connected to the cable distribution frame or to the phones directly or after being prolonged And the RJ11 connectors of the FXO interface cable can be connected to a subscriber s PBX or to the subscriber line at the Central Office Step 1 Connect the D50 male connector on one end of the cable to the card Step 2 Connect the RJ11 connectors on the other end of the cable to the following devices a Telephones Faxes or the ATO loop trunk lines of the telephone switchboard if FXS is used a Regular subscriber lines of the telephone switchboard if FXO is used CAUTION The screws at both sides of
196. kup Terminal access ISDN supported by SIC 1TPRI only SIC 1TPRI panel is shown in the following figure Figure 25 SIC 1TPRI panel a a HH A O LINKACT O LPIAL sic pag TT gag PR FT YT TT mrt tt y SIC 1T1 F panel is shown in the following figure Figure 26 SIC 1T1 F panel eee ag O LINKIACT O LPIAL SC ee a Fractional T1 AO TF FT FYTH rrrmT Tr y The status description of the LEDs is given in the following table SIC 1TPRI SIC 1T1 F 35 Table 9 Description of the LEDs on SIC 1TPRI SIC 1T1 F panel LED Description LINK ACT ON means the carrier signal has been received OFF means no carrier signal has been received Blinking means data is being transmitted or and received LP AL ON means the interface is in a loopback Blinking means an AIS LFA or RAI alarm signal is present OFF means no loopback or alarm is present Note AIS Alarm indication signal LFA loss of frame alignment RAI Remote alarm indication Interface Cable SIC 1TPRI SIC 1T1 F interface cable is 100 ohm standard shielded network cable that has RJ 45 connectors at both ends The following figure illustrates a SIC 1TPRI SIC 1T1 F interface cable Figure 27 T1 cable RJ45 RJ45 tea For the pinouts of T1 cable see Low End and Mid Range Series Router
197. l aI Tw AEL hU h be by br a hr ur m Ts Le ELA AD FE 1 Jee AT A F 15 fh A An aem A afn FAs ANED SAU Each channel on MIM 8ASE MIM 16ASE has only one LED It is ON when the link is connected and blinks when the link is active that is transmitting receiving data There are two types of interface cables for MIM 8ASE and MIM 16ASE AUX cable and dumb terminal cable RJ 45 RJ 45 which can be made on site using a network cable See Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual for their pinouts CAUTION AUX cable is optional When ordering an MIM 8ASE or MIM 16ASE module please order an AUX cable also By default it is not provided As for dumb terminal cables you can make them on site by reference to Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual WARNING Before plugging or unplugging interface cables connected to an MIM 8ASE or MIM 16ASE module power off the Router Online insertion or removal tends to damage the module and even the device CAUTION Read the mark identifying a port before you connect a cable to it making sure it is the correct port Wrong connection tends to damage interface modules and even the Router Step 1 Check port type of the device to be connected and choose the correct cable Step 2 Connect one end of the
198. l E1 interface module MIM 8E1 F 1 port channelized T1 interface module MIM 1T1 2 port channelized T1 interface module MIM 2T1 4 port channelized T1 interface module MIM 4T1 8 port channelized T1 interface module MIM 8T1 1 port fractional T1 interface module MIM 1T1 F 2 port fractional T1 interface module MIM 2T1 F 4 port fractional T1 interface module MIM 4T1 F 8 port fractional T1 interface module MIM 8T1 F 1 port channelized E3 interface module MIM 1CE3 1 port channelized T3 interface module MIM 1CT3 4 port ISDN BRI S T interface module using jumpers MIM 4BSE 1 port G SHDSL interface module MIM 1G SHDSL 12 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW Voice modules Encryption modules 1 port ATM 155 Mbps multi mode fiber interface module MIM 1AMM 1 port ATM 155 Mbps single mode fiber interface module MIM 1ASM 1 port ATM 155 Mbps single mode long haul fiber interface module MIM 1ASL 1 port 34 Mbps ATM E3 interface module MIM 1AE3 1 port 44 Mbps ATM T3 interface module MIM 1AT3 8 port E1 ATM inverse multiplexing interface module MIM IMA 8E 1 4 port E1 ATM inverse multiplexing interface module MIM IMA 4E 1 8 port T1 ATM inverse multiplexing interface module MIM IMA 8T 1 4 port T1 ATM inverse multiplexing interface module MIM IMA 4T 1 1 port SDH SONET interface module MIM 1POS 1 port channelized SDH SONET interface module E1 MIM 1CPOS E 1 port channelized SDH SONET interface module T1 MIM 1CPOS
199. l pair mode supports the sending receiving independent symmetric rates in the range from 384 kbps to 4624 kbps in steps of 16 kbps Tailor made 4 wire telephone cable G SHDSL over ordinary telephone lines The following figure illustrates the FIC 1SHL 4W panel Figure 266 FIC 1SHL 4W panel D 218 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Interface Cable Connecting the Interface Cable The following table describes the LEDs on the FIC 1SHL 4W panel Table 162 LEDs on the FIC 1SHL 4W panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received Blinking means data is being received or transmitted The FIC 1SHL 4W uses a tailor made 4 wire telephone cable of type Y or I You can select the type as needed m As shown in the following figure on one end of the type Y G SHDSL cable there is one RJ 11 connector X1 which is used to connect the FIC 1SHL 4W card On the other end there are two RJ 11 connectors X2 and X3 which can connect two 2 wire telephone cables On X1 pins 3 and 4 are connected with pins 3 and 4 on X2 and pins 2 and 5 are connected with pins 3 and 4 on X3 Figure 267 Type Y cable Ke all X3 UU m As shown in the following figure on the two ends of the I type G SHDSL cable there are RJ 11 connectors
200. l supported IPSec Hardware algorithm 1 key algorithm DES 3DES AES 2 Authentication algorithm HMAC MD5 96 HMAC SHA 1 96 The front panel of MIM HNDE module is shown in the following figure Figure 132 MIM HNDE panel status ACTIVE HNDE A Network Data Eneryption a ENDE Troubleshooting MIM 2VE1 Module Introduction MIM 2VE1 Module A17 Table 77 Description of the LEDs on the MIM HNDE panel LED Indication STATUS ON green The MIM HNDE module is powered on properly OFF There is no power supply damaged power supply or sever hardware failure ACTIVE OFF after flashing yellow for two seconds Initialized the MIM HNDE module Blinking continuously The MIM HNDE module operates normally and there is data transmission with the host OFF MIM HNDE module runs normally and no data transmission exists with the host 1 Symptom 1 The STATUS LED stays off after turning on the router Troubleshooting The STATUS LED should stay solid on after powered on The OFF status indicates that the MIM HNDE module or some hardware is not powered on properly Check the connection of the power supply If the device is powered on the failure may due to the damaged power supply of the module or abnormal operation of CPLD Complex Programmable Logic Device In these circumstances contact our agents for support Symptom 2 The ACTIVE LED stays off when powering on th
201. lanced twisted pair cable At the router side the connector of the cable is DB 15 male at the network side the connector is RJ 45 as illustrated in the following figure Figure 93 E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable w Pos 15 _ xI You can select a network interface connectors with an RJ 45 receptacle at both ends that connect two 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cables with BNC connectors The network interface connector is used in the extension connection with E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cables In addition a 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter is provided 84 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES For the pinouts of E1 cables see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual CAUTION E1 cable coaxial connector network interface connector and 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter are all optional accessories Please order them when purchasing MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 or MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F modules by default they are not provided Conversion cable for MIM 4E1 MIM 4E1 F module MIM 4E1 MIM 4E1 F modules provide two types of 1 to 4 conversion cables 120 ohm 4E1 conversion cable and 75 ohm 4E1 conversion cable At one end of these two types of cables is a DB 25 connector used to connect a router and at the other end are four DB 15 connectors used to connect E1 cables You can distinguish these two types of cables by the main labels There are the words M
202. lar MSR series routers a wide range of optional MIM DMIM multifunctional interface modules are available which provide abundant interfaces such as synchronous asynchronous serial interface Ethernet interface E1 T1 ISDN BRI PRI audio interface Layer 2 switching interface and so on Among the Layer 2 switching interface cards neither the XMIM 16FSW nor the XMIM 24FSW supports the PoE function while the MIM 16FSW and the DMIM 24FSW support the PoE function to provide 48 VDC power to remote PDs such as IP phone WLAN AP network camera through straight through network cables as long as installed in a PoE router MIM 1FE MIM 2FE MI M 4FE Modules Introduction Interface Attributes 1 2 4 port 10 100Base TX Fast Ethernet interface module MIM 1FE MIM 2FE MIM 4FE serves to complete communications between routers and LANs FE modules support a Effective transmission distance of 100 meters with category 5 twisted pair cables a Operating speeds of both 100 Mbps and 10 Mbps and autosensing m Both full duplex in common use and half duplex operating modes The interface attributes of MIM 1FE MIM 2FE MIM 4FE are given in the following table Table 37 Interface attributes of MIM 1FE MIM 2FE MIM 4FE Description MIM 1FE MIM 2FE MIM 4FE Attribute module module module Connector RJ 45 Type of interface MDI Number of connectors 1 2 4 Cable type Straight through Ethernet cable Operating mode Full duplex half du
203. le Table 153 Interface attributes of the FIC 16FSW FIC 16FSW PoE DFIC 24FSW DFIC 24FSW PoE FIC 16FSW FIC 16FSW PoE Attribute module DFIC 24FSW DFIC 24FSW PoE module Connector RJ45 SFP Interface type MDI MDIX Number of connectors 16x 100 Mbps 24x 100 Mbps RJ45 connectors RJ45 connectors one 1000 Mbps RJ45 connectors One SFP connector Two 1000 Mbps RJ45 connectors Two SFP connectors Cable type Standard straight through Ethernet cable Crossover Ethernet cable Operating mode 10 100 Mbps autosensing Full half duplex i gt MDI stands for Media Dependent Interface of the Ethernet Normally the interfaces on the network cards belong to this type MDIX stands for Cross Media Dependent Interface which is usually adopted on HUBs or LAN Switches Interface LEDs FIC 16FSW FIC 16FSW PoE panel is shown in the following figure 210 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Figure 256 FIC 16FSW FIC 16FSW PoE panel SalldeLink Flash Acthes Vo iA V2 3A V4 5A Ve TA V6 BA Vig WA Via 43A Vid tA of oor oo Soo Too oo Soo waar Aa SEPO Gee o o D J L PoE EW oae e ili e FA a ee ol LIS raw AIBASE THMBASE TH TDDS 1MOBASE T
204. le describes the LEDs on the card panel Interface Cable gt Connecting the Interface Cable SIC TADSL 53 Table 26 LEDs on the SIC 1ADSL panel LED Description LINK OFF means the loop is inactive ON means the loop has been activated and has entered the data mode Blinking means the loop is being activated ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received blinking means data is being received or and transmitted The interface cables that the SIC 1ADSL uses are regular telephone cables The standard equipping package of the SIC 1ADSL includes the regular telephone cable s You can separately order an external splitter as needed In G Lite mode no splitter is needed You can directly connect the router to the PSTN using a telephone cable and simply connect the phone set in parallel with the router at the cable distribution box In full rate mode a splitter is required Follow these steps to connect the cables Step 1 Plug one end of a telephone cable into the ADSL port on the router and the other end into the internal ADSL port on the splitter Step 2 Connect the telephone to the phone port on the splitter with another telephone cable Step 3 Connect the external ADSL port on the splitter to the PSTN with a third telephone cable Figure 48 Connecting the SIC 1ADSL Phone port Modem interface Line port ADSL card SIC 1ADSL I Introduction SIC 1ADSL I the 1 port ADSL over I
205. lowing table Table 6 Description and settings of the internal DIP switch of SIC ERRI SIC 1E1 F 120 ohm DIP switch Description 75 ohm impedance impedance 1BIT Switch for ON OFF 2BIT 75 ohm 120 ohm ON OFF options 3BIT ON OFF ABIT ON OFF 5BIT ON OFF 6BIT Switch for RxRing OFF RxRing grounding grounding mode via capacitor options ON RxRing directly grounding 30 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS N Interface LEDs Table 6 Description and settings of the internal DIP switch of SIC ERRI SIC 1E1 F 120 ohm DIP switch Description 75 ohm impedance impedance 7BIT Switch for RxShield ON RxShield grounding options grounding OFF RxShield ungrounding 8BIT Switch for RxShield OFF RxShield grounding options grounding via capacitor ON RxShield directly grounding CAUTION a When setting internal DIP switch you are recommended to turn ON all BITs from 1 to 8 when a 75 ohm cable is connected Turn OFF all BlTs from 1 to 8 when a 120 ohm cable is connected a The default configuration of internal DIP switch is that all the 8 positions of the BIT switch are ON that is the E1 interface impedance is 75 ohm SIC 1EPRI panel is shown in the following figure Figure 19 SIC 1EPRI panel mole GU O SIC MT ef EL CEI PRI rh EPRI ial LU Y y T 11 1 SIC 1E1 F panel is shown in the following figure Figure 20 SIC 1
206. m select E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair and 120 ohm 4E1 adapter cables and set all the BITs of the DIP switch to the OFF position that is the port impedance is 120 ohm Step 2 Insert the DB 25 connector of the 4E1 adapter cable into the to be connected port on the FIC 4E1 FIC 4E1 F and tighten the thumbscrews Step 3 Identify the sequence number of the DB 15 connector at the other end of the cable and connect the connector to an E1 cable Step 4 Connect the E1 cable to another device by reference to the previous subsection Step 5 Power on the router and check the behavior of the LINK LED on the card panel OFF means fault occurs on the line and the signal is not synchronized Check the line status FIC 8E1 FIC 8E1 F Introduction FIC 8E1 FIC 8E1 the 8 port channelized E1 PRI interface card transmits receives and processes eight channels of E1 data traffic In addition you can use the card for other purposes such as CE1 access and the ISDN PRI function FIC 8E1 F FIC 8E1 F the 8 port fractional E1 interface card is different from the FIC 8E1 interface card in the sense that 170 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS m The FE1 operating mode supported by the FIC 8E1 F card allows only one n x 64 kbps bundle to be formed on each interface where n 1 to 31 However a FIC 8E1 card allows arbitrary grouping of 31 channels and therefore multiple bundles m The FIC 8E1 F card does not support PRI mode
207. may be mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective owners ENVIRONMENTAL STATEMENT It is the policy of 3Com Corporation to be environmentally friendly in all operations To uphold our policy we are committed to Establishing environmental performance standards that comply with national legislation and regulations Conserving energy materials and natural resources in all operations Reducing the waste generated by all operations Ensuring that all waste conforms to recognized environmental standards Maximizing the recyclable and reusable content of all products Ensuring that all products can be recycled reused and disposed of safely Ensuring that all products are labelled according to recognized environmental standards Improving our environmental record on a continual basis End of Life Statement 3Com processes allow for the recovery reclamation and safe disposal of all end of life electronic components Regulated Materials Statement 3Com products do not contain any hazardous or ozone depleting material Environmental Statement about the Documentation The documentation for this product is printed on paper that comes from sustainable managed forests it is fully biodegradable and recyclable and is completely chlorine free The varnish is environmentally friendly and the inks are vegetable based with a low heavy metal content CONTENTS ABOUT THIS GUIDE Conventions 7 Related Documentation 8 OVERVIEW
208. n in the following table Table 86 Interface attributes of the MIM 16FSW MIM 16FSW PoE DMIM 24FSW DMIM 24FSW PoE MIM 16FSW MIM 16FSW P DMIM 24FSW DMIM 24FS Attribute oE module W PoE module Connector RJ45 RJ45 SFP fiber interface Interface type MDI MDIX MDI MDIX SFP fiber Number of connectors Cable type Operating mode 16 x 100 Mbps RJ45 connectors Straight through and crossover Ethernet cable 10 100 Mbps autosensing Full half duplex interface 24 x 100 Mbps RJ45 connectors Two 1000 Mbps RJ45 connectors Two SFP connectors Straight through and crossover Ethernet cable Fiber interface supports SFP fiber module 24 x 100 Mbps electrical interface 10 100 Mbps autosensing 2 x gigabit electrical interface 10 100 1000 Mbps autosensing 2 x gigabit fiber interface gigabit SFP fiber interface MDI stands for Media Dependent Interface of the Ethernet Normally the interfaces on the network cards belong to this type MDIX stands for Cross Media Dependent Interface which is usually adopted on hubs or LAN switches MIM 16FSW MIM 16FSW PoE panel is shown in the following figure MIM 16FSW MIM 16FSW PoE DMIM 24FSW DMIM 24FSW PoE 129 Figure 145 MIM 16FSW MIM 16FSW PoE panel u SalideLink Flash Active a iA 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 Vie 11 Viz 18 Vid 18 S cr T i m H il m i m i WU i rt i rt i ro 7
209. n the panels after power on If the LINK LED is ON a link is present If the LINK LED is OFF no link is present and in this case you should check the line 146 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS For modular MSR series routers a wide range of optional flexible interface cards double flexible interface cards FICs DFICs are available which provide abundant interfaces such as synchronous asynchronous serial interface Ethernet interface E1 T1 ISDN BRI PRI audio interface Layer 2 switching interface and so on Among this series interface cards the Layer 2 switching interface cards FIC 16FSW and DFIC 24FSW each have a corresponding PoE capable one which can provide 48 VDC power to remote PDs such as IP phone WLAN AP and network camera through straight through network cables as long as installed on a PoE router FIC 1FE FIC 2FE FIC 4F E Introduction Interface Attributes The 1 port 2 port and 4 port 10Base T 100Base TX fast Ethernet interface cards FIC 1FE FIC 2FE and FIC 4FE are mainly used for the communication between router and LAN The cards support m 100 meters 328 1 ft of transmission segment over the category 5 twisted pair cable m Operation at 100 Mbps and 10 Mbps autosensing a Full duplex and half duplex with the former in common use The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC 1FE FIC 2FE FIC 4FE cards Table 102 FIC 1FE FIC
210. nchronous Asynchronous Connector DB 28 Number of connectors 2 FIC 2SAE 4 FIC 4SAE 8 FIC 8SAE Interface LEDs FIC 2SAE FIC 4SAE FIC 8SAE 155 Table 109 Interface attributes of the FIC 2SAE FIC 4SAE FIC 8SAE Description Attribute Synchronous Asynchronous Interface standard and V 24 V 35 RS449 X 21 RS232 operating mode RS530 DTE DTE DCE DCE Min baud rate bps 1200 1200 300 Max baud rate bps 64k 4 096 M 2 048 M 115 2 Cable V 24 RS232 DTE cable V 24 RS232 DCE cable V 35 DTE cable V 35 DCE cable X 21 DTE cable X 21 DCE cable RS449 DTE cable RS449 DCE cable RS530 DTE cable RS530 DCE cable 4 Terminal access service Supported service 1 DDN leased line 1 Dialup through modem 2 Terminal access service 2 Backup 3 Asynchronous leased line The following figures show the FIC 2SAE and FIC 4SAE panels Figure 178 FIC 2SAE panel a oo a r Tan en a O UK C B 0000 00 2SAE T 7 Ae 28AE Figure 179 FIC 4SAE panel D a Jl goana S i AGT 2 on The following table describes the LEDs on the FIC 2SAE FIC 4SAE panel Table 110 LEDs on the FIC 2SAE FIC 4SAE panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present 156 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Interface Cable Table 110 LEDs on the FIC 2SAE FIC 4SAE panel LED Description ACT OFF me
211. necting the interface cable pay attention to the mark on the interface to avoid wrong insertion which may damage the interface card or even the router host a f outdoor cabling is involved you need to install a lightning arrester at the input end of the SIC BU SIC BS interface cable to avoid lightning strike After the interface card is properly installed follow these steps to connect the cable Step 1 Verify the type of the ISDN line provided by your telecommunications service provider Step 2 Connect the cable m For SIC 1BS SIC 2BS If the line is an ISDN U interface line use an NT1 for conversion Insert one end of the telephone cable with ferrite core into the BRI S T interface of SIC 1BS SIC 2BS and the other end to NT1 If the line is an ISDN S T interface line insert one end of the telephone cable with ferrite core to the BRI S T interface of SIC 1BS SIC 2BS and connects the other end with the ISDN S T interface line 58 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS a For SIC 1BU SIC 2BU interface card If the line is an ISDN U interface line insert one end of the telephone cable with ferrite core into the BRI U interface of SIC 1BU SIC 2BU and connect the other end with the ISDN U interface line If the line is an ISDN S T interface line contact your agent to change the interface card to SIC 1BS SIC 2BS Step 3 Check the ON LED on the panel of the interface card If the LED is on the interface is powered on If th
212. ng transmitted or received The following figure illustrates the 8T1 conversion cable for the MIM 8T1 MIM 8T1 F module Figure 109 8T1 conversion cable JA aroma oss E ht At one end of the cable is a DB 68 connector for connecting the router and at the other end are eight RJ 45 connectors for connecting other devices CAUTION Before you connect a port read its label carefully a wrong connection can impair the interface module and even damage the device You are recommended to install a special lightning arrester at the input end of the interface cable for better lightning protection Step 1 Insert the DB 68 connector of the 8T1 conversion cable to the DB 68 port on the MIM 8T1 MIM 8T1 F module MIM 1CE3 Module 97 Step 2 Connect one RJ 45 connector at the other end of the cable to the device to be connected Step 3 Power on the router Check the behavior of the LINK LED on the module panel It is OFF when fault has occurred on the link and signal is out of synchronization In this case please check the link MIM 1CE3 Module Introduction Interface Attributes Interfac
213. nnect the cable to the port on the CSU DSU m If the WAN is a dialup line connect the cable to the serial port of an analog modem Step 4 Power on the router and check behavior of the LINK LED on the FIC SAE panel It is OFF when fault occurs on the line and signal is not synchronized Check the line status FIC 8ASE FIC 16ASE Introduction Functions FIC 8ASE FIC 16ASE 8 16 port enhanced asynchronous serial interface card transmits receives and processes data traffic on asynchronous serial interfaces Each asynchronous serial interface can operate at a speed as fast as 115 2 kbps supporting terminal access service and asynchronous leased line In addition these asynchronous serial interfaces can serve as the dialup access servers for the small 160 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Interface Attributes Interface LEDs Interface Cable and medium sized ISPs to interconnect eight using the FIC 8ASE or 16 using the FIC 16ASE LANs through asynchronous dialup lines The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC 8ASE and FIC 16ASE Table 111 Interface attributes of the FIC 8ASE FIC 16ASE Description Attribute FIC 8ASE FIC 16ASE Connector RJ 45 Number of connectors 8 FIC 8ASE 16 FIC 16ASE Interface standard and operating RS232 mode Cable type AUX cable Ethernet straight through cable FIC 8ASE FIC 16ASE dumb terminal cable Min baud rate bps 300 Max baud rate
214. nterface Attributes FIC 1G SHDSL the 1 port single pair high speed digital subscriber line card uses trellis coded pulse amplitude modulation TCPAM for coding and provides the symmetric rates up to 2 3 Mbps Its transmission speed can automatically adapt to cable length and conditions Compared with ADSL G SHDSL allows longer transmission segment and as such can serve a wider range of applications It can substitute for E1 T1 lines to provide high speed data service access However as TCPAM uses the band starting from 0 Hz for data transmission G SHDSL cannot share the same line with POTS or ISDN just like what ADSL has done The FIC 1G SHDSL supports a Manual G SHDSL line activation deactivation and easy to use fault location tools m G 992 1 compliant interface and auto sensing The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC 1G SHDSL Table 135 Interface attributes of the FIC 1G SHDSL Attribute FIC 1G SHDSL Connector RJ 11 Number of connectors 1 Interface standard G 991 2 Interface LEDs Interface Cable Connecting the Interface Cable FIC 1POS 191 Table 135 Interface attributes of the FIC 1G SHDSL Attribute FIC 1G SHDSL Interface rate In single pair mode supports the sending receiving independent symmetric rates in the range from 192 kbps to 2304 kbps in steps of 8 kbps Interface cable Telephone cable Supported services G SHDSL over telephone lines The following figure illustra
215. nterface cable Supported service Voice access over ISDN S interface cable The following figure illustrates the FIC 2BSV panel Figure 272 FIC 2BSV panel UKO ACT 285V O OUK O aT 1 i Q The following figure illustrates the FIC 4BSV panel Figure 273 FIC 4BSV panel O 2BSV LINK ATO d 28Sv The following table describes the LEDs on the FIC 2BSV FIC 4BSV panel Table 166 LEDs on the FIC 2BSV FIC 4BSV panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received blinking means data is being transmitted or received Interface Cable Connecting the Interface Cable N FIC 2BSV FIC 4BSV Module 223 When a BSV interface works in user mode it uses a straight through ISDN S T interface cable for connection At the two ends of the cable are RJ 45 connectors with pins 3 and 6 for data transmission and pins 4 and 5 for data receiving Figure 274 Straight through ISDN S T cable Green Black y When a BSV interface works in network mode it uses a crossover ISDN S T interface cable for connection with pins 3 and 6 for data transmission and pins 4 and 5 for data receiving At one end of the cable is an RJ 45 male connector for connecting the FIC 2BSV FIC 4BSV interface and at the other end of th
216. nterface cables T1 cables for MIM 1T1 MIM 2T1 MIM 4T1 and MIM 1T1 F MIM 2T1 F MIM 4T1 F modules are 100 ohm straight through shielding network cables as shown in the following figure 94 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES N Connecting the Interface Cable N Figure 106 T1 cable RJ45 RJ45 8 8 In addition you may use a network interface connector to extend aT1 cable Both ends of the connector are RJ 45 jacks that can connect two network cables 1 1 CAUTION Both T1 cable and network interface connector are optional accessories Please order them together with the MIM 1T1 MIM 1T1 MIM 4T1 or MIM 1T1 F MIM 2T1 F MIM 4T1 F module By default they are not provided For the cable pinouts see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual CAUTION a Read the mark identifying a port before you connect a cable to it making sure it is the correct port Wrong connection tends to damage interface modules and even the Router um Some protection measures are taken for MIM 1T1 MIM 2T1 MIM 4T1 module Still you are recommended to install a special lightning arrester at the input end of the cable leading to the outdoors in order to protect the line against lightning strikes more efficiently Step 1 Insert one end of a T1 cable into the RJ 45 connector on the T1 or T1 F module Step 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the device
217. o n u O gw A fr cf fm f T 4 T hfi Th dih r T hh a Aa or The following table describes the LEDs on the MIM 2BSV MIM 4BSV panel Table 95 Description of the LEDs on the MIM 2BSV MIM 4BSV panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT Slowly blinking means data is being transmitted or received on B1 channel Fast blinking means data is being transmitted or received on B2 channel Steady ON means data is being transmitted or received on both B1 and B2 channels Steady OFF means no data is being transmitted or received When a BSV interface works in user mode it uses a straight through ISDN S T interface cable for connection At both ends of the cable are RJ 45 connectors with pins 3 and 6 for data transmission and pins 4 and 5 for data receiving Figure 157 Straight through ISDN S T cable Green Black d 138 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES Connecting the Interface Cable AN When a BSV interface works in network mode it uses a crossover ISDN S T interface cable for connection with pins 3 and 6 for data transmission and pins 4 and 5 for data receiving At one end of the cable is an RJ 45 plug for connecting the BSV interface and at the other end of the cable is an RJ 45 receptacle for connecting a TE device Figure 158 Crossover ISDN S T cable Jie M a i
218. o not support PRI mode The interface attributes of MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 and MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F are given in the following table Table 46 Interface attributes of MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 and MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F Description MIM 1E1 1E1 MIM 2E1 2E1 Attribute F module F module MIM 4E1 4E1 F module Connector DB 15 DB 15 DB 25 Number of 1 2 1 connectors Interface standard G 703 G 704 82 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES Interface LEDs Table 46 Interface attributes of MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 and MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F Description MIM 1E1 1E1 MIM 2E1 2E1 Attribute F module F module MIM 4E1 4E1 F module Interface rate 2 048 Mbps Cable type E1 75 ohm non balanced coaxial cable E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable 120 ohm 4E1 conversion cable MIM 4E1 MIM 4E1 F modules 75 ohm 4E1 conversion cable MIM 4E1 MIM 4E1 F modules Coaxial connector network interface connector and 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter with BNC connector Operating mode E1 CE1 ISDN PRI only supported by MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 FE1 only supported by MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F Supported service 1 Backup 2 Terminal access service 3 ISDN PRI only supported by MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 MIM 1E1 and MIM 1E1 F panels are similar The following figure illustrates an MIM 1E1 panel Figure 89 MIM 1E1 panel mm E e TT e E IU Fee Z fA l The panels of MIM 2E1 and MIM 2E
219. om the FIC 1T1 FIC 2T1 FIC 4T1 primarily in the sense that m The FT1 operating mode supported by the T1 F cards allows only one n x 64 kbps or n x 56 kbps bundle to be formed on each interface where n 1 to 24 However a T1 card allows arbitrary grouping of 24 channels and multiple bundles m The FIC T1 F cards do not support PRI mode The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC T1 FIC T1 F cards FIC 1T1 FIC 2T1 FIC 4T1 and FIC 1T1 F FIC 2T1 F FIC 4T1 F 173 Table 118 Interface attributes of the FIC T1 FIC T1 F cards Attribute Description Connector RJ 45 Number of connectors Interface standard Interface rate Cable type Operating mode Supported service 1 FIC 1T1 FIC 1T1 F 2 FIC 2T1 FIC 2T1 F 4 FlC 4T1 FIC 4T1 F G 703 T1 102 G 704 AT amp T TR 54016 AT amp T TR 62411 ANSI T1 403 1 544 Mbps T1 cable 100 ohm straight through shielded cable CT1 ISDN PRI only supported by the FIC T1 cards FT1 only supported by the FIC T1 F cards Backup Leased line ISDN PRI only supported by the FIC 1T1 FIC 2T1 FIC 4T1 card Interface LEDs The following figure illustrates the FIC 1T1 panel Figure 211 FIC 1T1 panel LINKIACT LP AL The following figure illustrates the FIC 2T1 panel Figure 212 FIC 2T1 panel O ai oo
220. one to impair the interface card and even damage the router SNDE Standard network data encryption card supports IPSec and hardware expedited IP data packet encryption thus providing encryption with high performance and reliability Installed with an SNDE card the main board of your router can implement VPN with encryption provided by the SNDE card in addition to IP packet forwarding The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC HNDE Table 173 Interface attributes of the SNDE module Attribute Description Protocol supported IPSec IPSec concurrent tunnels 100 implemented through software Hardware algorithm key algorithm DES 3DES AES QC5 Blowfish Cast 128 and SkipJack Authentication algorithm HMAC MD5 96 HMAC SHA 1 96 There is no LED on the SNDE module Display of the status of the module is implemented through the ESM interface LED on the main board of the router The following table describes the LEDs on the SNDE panel Installing Removing SNDE Card AN VCPM Module 231 Table 174 Description of the LEDs on the SNDE LED Description ESMx Green SNDE card is in the slot and is operating normally Yellow SNDE card is in the slot but cannot be accessed by the router Note x means the number of the slot the ESM LED is in SNDE card should be installed on the main board and the ESM slot on the MSCA card of MSR 20 30 router The board that provides ESM slots is referred to
221. onnection cable to obtain better lightning protection when the cable is led outdoors a Read the mark identifying a port before you connect a cable to it making sure it is the correct port Wrong connection tends to damage the MIM and even the Router Step 1 Plug the DB 15 connector of the cable into the DB 15 port on the FIC 1VE1 module and fasten the screws Step 2 Connect the RJ 45 connector of the cable to m The peer device directly if the resistance of the port to be connected is 120 ohm and there is no need to extend the cable a A network interface connector and then the peer device using another E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable if the resistance of the port to be connected is 120 ohm and there is a need to extend the cable as illustrated in the following figure Figure 253 Extending E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable DB 15 RJ 45 RJ 45 Voice Router A k Device T 120 ohm balanced Network interface 120 ohm E1 twisted pair cable connector trunk cable m The peer device using a 750hm to 1200hm adapter if the resistance of the peer device is 75 ohm Step 3 Power on the Router and check the LINK LED on the FIC 1VE1 panel It is OFF when fault has occurred on the link In this case please check the link FIC 1VT1 Introduction gt 1 port T1 voice interface module FIC 1VT1 can handle dense voice signals in VoIP system It p
222. ot supplied CAUTION a You should connect a cable to the port with the correct mark Misplugging is prone to impair the card and even damage the router a When using T1 cable outdoors you are recommended to install a special lightning arrester on the input end of the cable in order to avoid lightning more effectively If the SIC has been properly installed follow these steps to connect the cable Step 1 Plug one end of T1 cable into the RJ45 connector of SIC 1VT1 Step 2 Connect the other end of T1 cable to the peer device Step 3 Check the status of LINK LED on the SIC 1VT1 panel OFF means the link is not connected In the latter case check the line SIC 1ADSL Introduction SIC 1ADSL the 1 port ADSL over PSTN interface card provides an RJ 11 interface that can work as a WAN interface It allows a LAN subscriber to connect to the digital subscriber s loop access multiplexer DSLAM at the central office over a regular analog subscriber line or telephone line Thus the subscriber can access the ATM IP backbone or the Internet to enjoy services such as high speed data communication and video on demand VoD ADSL transmits data in the high freguency band above 26 kHz Therefore it can provide services without interfering with the voice service being provided in the low freguency band 0 to 4 kHz on the same line It provides downlink rates in the range 32 kbps to 8 Mbps and uplink rates in the range 32 kbps to 1 Mbps T
223. panel It is OFF when fault has occurred on the link In this case please check the link 202 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS FIC 2VT1 Introduction gt Interface Attributes Interface LEDs 2 port T1 voice interface module FIC 2VT1 can handle dense voice signals in VoIP system It provides two CE1 PRI ports allowing the access of 48 channels of voice signals a VCPM is provided to users together with FIC 2VT1 Users can select VPM module as needed a VPM module is installed on the main board of FIC 2VT1 The interface attributes of FIC 2VT1 are given in the following table Table 147 Interface attributes of FIC 2VT1 Attribute Description Connector RJ45 Number of connector 2 Interface standard G 703 T1 102 G 704 AT amp T TR 54016 AT amp T TR 62411 ANSI T1 403 Interface rate 1 544 Mbps Cable type T1 cable 100 ohm standard shielded cable Operation mode CT1 ISDN PRI Services Backup Terminal access ISDN FIC 2VT1 panel is shown in the following figure Figure 248 FIC 2VT1 panel LINK O O LINK NTI NTI eu AT O ACT 8 TUPRI 4 i fi i oro oo Description of the LEDs on FIC 2VT1 panel is given in the following table Interface Cable N Connecting the Interface Cable N FIC 2
224. plex 10 100 Mbps autosensing 68 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES Interface LEDs MIM 1FE panel is shown in the following figure Figure 63 MIM 1FE panel Uu I Y AAD AA AA AAAA AAAA AA AAAA Qu qE OTa 1FE 0 OAO O 0Base TMH00Base TX OO 5 65 6565 MIM 2FE panel is shown in the following figure Figure 64 MIM 2FE panel i 0990999000000000 Ou Ou ope Ofa r a_i Oact FE 0 1__ 10Base T00Base TX G66666666 N MIM 4FE panel is shown in the following figure Figure 65 MIM 4FE panel I a a ce 7 LU TW r EL E FE i 1 i T T i I I T i V OUINK Eo OLUKO Eo LAKO sE OACT a a OAcTO a u Li acTO 4FE r fl 4 OR ase T 100Rase T A J The following table describes the LEDs on the MIM 1FE MIM 2FE MIM 4FE panel
225. ption FIC IMA 4E1 FIC IMA 8E1 FICIMA 4E1 120 ohm bic jA gg1 Attribute 75 ohm 75 ohm 120 ohm Cable type 75 ohm 4E1 75 ohm8E1 120 ohm 120 ohm 8E1 conversion conversion conversion 4E1 cable cable cable conversion cable Max transmission 500 m 1640 4 ft 150 m 492 1 ft distance Operating mode ATM E1 independent link IlMA bundle mode Supported service AAL5 Protocol PPPoA PPPoEoA IPoA IPOEOA Transmission rate CBR VBR rt VBR nrt UBR The following figures illustrate the FIC IMA 4E1 and FIC IMA 8E1 75 ohm panels Figure 259 75 ohm FIC IMA 4E1 panel Figure 260 75 ohm FIC IMA 8E1 panel The following table describes the LEDs on the FIC IMA 4E1 FIC IMA 8E1 panel Table 158 LEDs on the FIC IMA 4E1 FIC IMA 8E1 panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received blinking means data is being received or transmitted The FIC IMA 4E1 card provides four E1 ports and uses a 120 ohm or 75 ohm 4E1 conversion cable The two types of 4E1 conversion cables look similar Both of them have a DB 68 connector at one end for connecting the router However the 75 ohm 4E1 conversion cable contains eight coaxial cables and the 120 ohm 4E1 conversion cable contains four twisted pairs 214 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Connecting the Interface Cable The FIC IMA 8E1 card provides eight E1 ports and uses a 120 ohm or 75 ohm 8E1
226. pying two slots Interface Cable The interface cable of MIM 1VT1 is a standard 100 ohm standard shielding cable The connectors on the two ends use RJ 45 The following figure illustrates this type of cable A Connecting the Interface Cable A MIM 16FSW MIM 16FSW PoE DMIM 24FSW DMIM 24FSW PoE 127 Figure 144 T1 cable RJ45 RJ45 For the pinouts of T1 cables see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual CAUTION The corresponding cables are not included in the standard shipment package of MIM 1VT1 Please order them together with MIM 1VT1 By default they are not supplied CAUTION a You should connect a cable to the port with the correct mark Misplugging is prone to impair the card and even damage the router a When using T1 cable outdoors you are recommended to install a special lightning arrester on the input end of the cable in order to avoid lightning more effectively If the MIM has been properly installed follow these steps to connect the cable Step 1 Plug one end of T1 cable into the RJ45 connector of MIM 1VT1 Step 2 Connect the other end of T1 cable to the peer device Step 3 Check the status of LINK LED on the MIM 1VT1 panel OFF means the link is not connected In the latter case check the line MIM 16FSW MIM 16F SW PoE DMIM 24FSW DMIM 24FSW PoE Introduction The 16 24 port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Layer 2 switching MIM interface mo
227. r cable pinouts see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual CAUTION Some measures are taken to protect FIC 2VE1 module Still you are recommended to install a special lightning arrester at the input end of its connection cable to obtain better lightning protection when the cable is led outdoors Read the mark identifying a port before you connect a cable to it making sure it is the correct port Wrong connection tends to damage the FIC and even the Router Step 1 Plug the DB 15 connector of the cable into the DB 15 port on the FIC 2VE1 module and fasten the screws Step 2 Connect the RJ 45 connector of the cable to The peer device directly if the resistance of the port to be connected is 120 ohm and there is no need to extend the cable A network interface connector and then the peer device using another E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable if the resistance of the port to be connected is 120 ohm and there is a need to extend the cable as illustrated in the following figure Figure 247 Extending E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable DB 15 RJ 45 RJ 45 Voice Router Ss Device a 120 ohm balanced Network interface 120 ohm E1 twisted pair cable connector trunk cable The peer device using a 750hm to 1200hm adapter if the resistance of the peer device is 75 ohm Step 3 Power on the Router and check the LINK LED on the FIC 2VE1
228. r case check the line Connecting Ethernet electrical cable Step 1 Use a crossover cable for the connection to a PC router and straight through cable to a Hub LAN Switch Plug one end of the cable to an Ethernet port of the Router and another end to the desired peer device Step 2 Check the status of LINK LED on the module panel ON means the link is connected and OFF means the link is not connected In the latter case check the line MIM IMA 4E1 MIM IM A 8E1 Module Introduction Interface Attributes The 4 port 8 port E1 ATM inverse multiplexing interface module MIM IMA 4E1 MIM IMA 8E1 provides four eight E1 interfaces that support the IMA inverse multiplexing for ATM technology The IMA technology combines multiple low speed links into a group to support a high speed ATM cell stream It distributes an ATM cell stream over multiple low speed E1 links on cell by cell basis at the transmission end and reassembles the cells on the low speed E1 links into the original stream at the far end This technology provides a scalable and cost effective solution and is commonly used in plesiochronous digital hierarchy PDH networks to transport ATM cells The following table describes the interface attributes of the MIM IMA 4E1 MIM IMA 8E1 module Table 90 Interface attributes of the MIM IMA 4E1 MIM IMA 8E 1 Description MIM IM A 4E1 75 ohm MIM IMA 8E1 MIM IMA 4E1 MIM IMA 8E1 Attribute 75 ohm 120 ohm 120 ohm
229. re it is the correct port Wrong connection tends to damage interface modules and even the Router a As provisioned by Bell V cables for FXS FXO E amp M modules do not provide PGND wire For this reason a loop should be formed via the earth ground between the Router and the connected switch In practice the PGND wire of the switch can be connected to the chassis of the Router a 7o ensure the EMC of the whole Router you should connect the end of the cable with ferrite core to the Router Step 1 Plug one end of the cable into the RJ 45 port on 2FXS 2FXO 2E amp M Step 2 Connect the other end of the cable to m Telephone set fax or ATO loop trunk of telephone exchange if you have installed an FXS module m Subscriber line of telephone exchange if you have installed an FXO module m E amp M trunk of telephone exchange if you have installed an E amp M module MIM HNDE Module Introduction Interface Attributes Interface LEDs High Network Data Encryption MIM HNDE for short supports IPSec protocol multiple hardware encryption decryption and hash algorithm to speed up the encryption of the IP packets featuring high performance and high reliability Insert MIM HNDE module in the MIM slot of a low end and mid range modular router The main board forwards the IP packets and implements the VPN with encryption feature which is complemented by encryption card Table 76 MIM HNDE module features Feature Description Protoco
230. rface Interface Interface Interface Interface Interface d E1 0 0 1 0 1 2 3 interface By default all the DIP switch BlTs are placed to the position of ON as illustrated in the following figure FIC 1E1 FIC 2E1 FIC 4E1 and FIC 1E1 F FIC 2E1 F FIC 4E1 F 167 Figure 204 Default setting of the DIP switches for the FIC E1 FIC E1 F cards 5 PG The following table describes how to set a DIP switch on the FIC E1 FIC E1 F cards Table 115 Setting DIP switches on the FIC E1 FIC E1 F cards Configuration of Configuration of 120 ohm DIP switch Description 75 ohm impedance impedance 1BIT 75 ohm 120 ohm ON OFF BIT toggle switch ON OFF 3BIT ON OFF ABIT ON OFF 5BIT ON OFF 6BIT RxRing grounding OFF RxRing is mode switch grounded using capacitance ON RxRing is grounded directly 7BIT RxShield grounding ON RxShield is switch grounded OFF RxShield is not grounded 8BIT RxShield grounding OFF RxShield is mode switch grounded using capacitance ON RxShield is grounded directly CAUTION When connecting an FIC E1 FIC E1 F card to an external 75 ohm cable you are recommended to place BlTs 1 through 8 to the ON position when connecting the card to an external 120 ohm cable place BlTs 1 through 8 to the OFF position Only trained personnel are allowed to change the settings of the DIP switches By default all th
231. rface works in user mode traffic is processed as follows The digital voice traffic received from the B channels on the BSV interface is decompressed and forwarded through the CPU on the main control board to a local FXS or FXO analog voice interface The voice signals received on the local FXS or FXO analog voice interface are processed by VolP and forwarded through the CPU on the main control board to SIC 1BSV SIC 2BSV where the traffic is compressed and sent out of the BSV interface to the ISDN switch m Working in conjunction with the FXS or FXO analog voice interface modules SIC 1BSV SIC 2BSV provides flexibility in voice call routing m The ISDN BRI D channel signaling is processed separately on CPU m A BSV interface supports remote power supply and thus can be connected directly to an ISDN phone saving extra power supply device m The SIC 1BSV SIC 2BSV card is dedicated to voice applications which is different from the BS interface cards where BRI data applications are supported Interface Attributes Interface LEDs SIC 1BSV SIC 2BSV 59 Table 31 Interface attributes of SIC 1BSV SIC 2BSV Attribute SIC 1BSV SIC 2BSV Connector RJ45 Number of connectors 1 2
232. rking as DCE interface Four types of test measures that is local cell loopback local payload loopback remote payload loopback and remote line loopback You are allowed to equip an H3C Series Router with MIM AE3 modules to its full capacity Yet you are recommended to install only one MIM AE3 module on it whatever its model is to ensure the performance of some Key services The interface attributes of MIM 1AE3 are given in the following table Table 67 Interface attributes of MIM 1AE3 Attribute 1AE3 module Connector SMB Connector number 2 Interface standard G 703 G 751 G 832 G 823 Interface rate 34 368 Mbps Cable E3 T3 cable 75 ohm coaxial cables Supported service ATM Traffic CBR rt_VBR nrt_VBR UBR 108 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES gt Interface LEDs Interface Cable gt Connecting the Interface Cable N In the supported services described in the above table CBR represents Constant Bit Rate rt_VBR represents Variable Bit Rate Real Time nrt_VBR represents Variable Bit Rate Non Real Time and UBR represents Unspecified Bit Rate MIM 1AE3 panel is shown in the following figure Figure 120 MIM 1AE3 panel jaa O ACT AES ft A AAAA DB AAPAAAAAAMAAA BY AAAAA f j The following table describes the LEDs on the MIM 1AE3 panel Table 68 Description of the LEDs on the MIM 1AE3 panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link
233. rovides a CT1 PRI port allowing the access of 24 channels of voice signals a VCPM is provided to users together with FIC 1VT1 Users can select VPM module as needed a VPM module is installed on the main board of FIC 1VT1 Interface Attributes Interface LEDs Interface Cable Table 151 Attribute Connector Number of connector Interface standard Interface rate Cable type Operation mode Services Interface attributes of FIC 1VT1 FIC 1VT1 207 The interface attributes of FIC 1VT1 are given in the following table Description RJ45 1 G 703 T1 102 G 704 AT amp T TR 54016 AT amp T TR 62411 ANSI T1 403 1 544 Mbps T1 cable 100 ohm standard shielded cable CT1 ISDN PRI Backup Terminal access ISDN FIC 1VT1 panel is shown in the following figure Figure 254 FIC 1VT1 panel act O O LINK 1T TIPR G 1VT1 Description of the LEDs on FIC 1VT1 panel is given in the following table Table 152 Description of the LEDs on FIC 1VT1 panel LED Description LINK ON means carrier signal is received OFF means no carrier signal is received ACT OFF No data is being received and transmitted Blinking Data is being received and transmitted The interface cable of FIC 1VT1 is a standard 100 ohm standard shielding cable The connectors on
234. s a SIC FXO cards are loop trunk cards that provide access of common subscriber lines of exchanges CAUTION While using SIC FXS SIC FXO you must ensure that the H3C Routers can be connected to IP networks or other WANS The interface attributes of SIC 1FXS SIC 1FXO and SIC 2FXS SIC 2FXO are given in the following table 38 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS Interface LEDs Table 12 Interface attributes of SIC 1FXS SIC 1FXO and SIC 2FXS SIC 2FXO Attribute Description Connector type RJ11 Number of connectors Interface standard Cable type Dialing mode Bandwidth m SIC 1FXS SIC 1FXO panel Figure 30 SIC 1FXS panel 1 SIC 1FXS SIC 1FXO 2 SIC 2FXS SIC 2FXO Subscriber circuit interface SIC 1FXS SIC 2FXS compliant with ITU O 512 Loop trunk interface SIC 1FXO SIC 2FXO compliant with ITU O 552 Over current and over voltage protection compliant with ITU K 20 Telephone cable with ferrite core Supports DTMF not supports pulse dial up 300 Hz to 3400 Hz
235. s Cable Manual 8 1 A CAUTION Relevant cables are included in the standard shipment package of SIC 1TPRI SIC 1T1 F Please order them together with SIC 1TPRI SIC 1T1 F By default they are not supplied Connecting the Interface Cable M CAUTION a You should connect a cable to the port with the correct mark Improper plugging is prone to impair the SIC MIM and even damage the router m When using T1 cable outdoors you are recommended to install a special lightning arrester on the input end of the cable so as to avoid lightning more effectively If the SIC has been properly installed follow these steps to connect the cable Step 1 Connect one end of the T1 cable to the RJ 45 port of SIC 1TPRI SIC 1T1 F 36 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS Step 2 Connect the other end of the T1 cable to the relevant equipment Step 3 Check the status of LINK LED on the SIC 1TPRI SIC 1T1 F panel ON means the link is connected and OFF means the link is not connected In the latter case check the line SIC 1AM SIC 2AM Introduction Interface Attributes Interface LEDs 1 2 port analog modem interface card SIC 1AM SIC 2AM integrates the functions of asynchronous interface and external modem that is allowing 1 2 channel s of remote modem subscribers to directly access the Router They support m Data rate of 56 kbps m Accessing and handling analog
236. s at the specified rate The router normally works as a DTE To identify whether the equipment connected to the router is DTE or DCE refer to the manual shipped with the equipment Speed and transmission segment of synchronous asynchronous serial interface In different operating modes the synchronous asynchronous serial interface supports different electric signal specifications and baud rates In addition the maximum signal transmission segment depends not only on the specified baud rate but also on the selected cable The following table shows how the cable type baud rate and the maximum signal transmission segment related to each other Table 108 Speed and transmission segment of the V 24 RS232 V 35 cable V 24 RS232 V 35 Max transmission segment Max transmission Baud rate bps segment Baud rate bps 2400 60 m 196 9 ft 2400 1250 4101 ft 4800 60 m 196 9 ft 4800 625 m 2050 5 ft 9600 30 m 98 4 ft 9600 312 m 1023 6 ft 19200 30 m 98 4 ft 19200 156 m 511 8 ft 38400 20 m 65 6 ft 38400 78m 255 9 ft 64000 20 m 65 6 ft 56000 60 m 196 9 ft 115200 10 m 32 8 ft 64000 50 m 164 ft 2048000 30 m 98 4 ft When a V 24 cable is used the baud rate of the FIC SA in synchronous mode shall not exceed 64 Kbps The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC SAE Table 109 Interface attributes of the FIC 2SAE FIC 4SAE FIC 8SAE Description Attribute Sy
237. se notes use the information in the Release Notes These documents are available in Adobe Acrobat Reader Portable Document Format PDF on the CD ROM that accompanies your router or on the 3Com World Wide Web site http www 3Com com OVERVIEW This manual covers three broad categories of interface cards and modules available with MSR Series Routers smart interface card double smart interface card SIC DSIC multiplex interface module double multiplex interface module expand multiplex interface module MIM DMIM XMIM and flexible interface card double flexible interface card FIC DFIC SIC DSIC Interface Cards Ethernet interface cards WAN interface cards Currently the following types of SIC DSIC interface cards are available 1 port 10 100 1000 Mbps electrical and fiber interface card SIC 1GEC 1 port 10Base T 100Base TX Ethernet interface card SIC 1FEA 1 port 100 Mbps fiber Ethernet interface card SIC 1FEF 4 port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Layer 2 switching interface card SIC 4FSW 9 port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Layer 2 switching interface card DSIC 9FSW 4 port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Layer 2 switching PoE interface card SIC 4FSW POE 9 port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Layer 2 switching PoE interface card DSIC 9FSW POE 1 port enhanced high speed synchronous asynchronous serial interface card SIC 1SAE 8 port asynchronous serial interface card SIC 8AS 1 port E1 CE1 PRI compatible interface card SIC 1 EPRI 1 port fract
238. signals and transmitting the processed data to the Router host through the serial interface bus And also processing the data received from the host and then transmitting them to the PSTN via the telephone port The interface attributes of SIC 1AM SIC 2AM are given in the following table Table 10 Interface attributes of SIC 1AM SIC 2AM Attribute Description Connector type RJ11 Number of connectors 1 SIC 1AM 2 SIC 2AM Cable type Telephone cable with ferrite core Maximum speed 56 kbps Supported standard ITU T V 90 V 34 33 6 kbps V FC V 32 bis V 32 V 22 bis V 22A B V 23 V 21 Bell 212A a Bell 103 Supported service Modem dial up Figure 28 SIC 1AM panel mn gn BE S E a a a Ou ANALOG O ACT SIC NODEN LINED 1AM s Figure 29 SIC 2AM pane m fn ff wee TIT O Link ANALOG O ACT ACT O SIC MODEM LINEO LINE 2AM A A T T Interface Cable N Connecting the Interface Cable N SIC 1FXS SIC 1FXO amp SIC 2FXS SIC 2FXO 37 Table 11 Description of the LEDs on SIC 1AM SIC 2AM panel LED Description LINK OFF means the link is idle ON means the connection has been established Blinking means the connection is being set up ACT
239. stalled on the main board and the ESM slot on the MSCA card of MSR 20 30 50 router The board that provides ESM slots is referred to hereafter as mother board Suppose the mother board is uninstalled and put on the workbench Removing ANDE card Follow these steps to remove the ANDE card 230 CHAPTER 5 ESM VCPM MODULE N SNDE Module Introduction Interface Attributes Interface LEDs Step 1 Remove the fastening screws on the ANDE card Step 2 Remove the ANDE card from the mother board Do not overexert when removing the ANDE card because the connector of the daughter board is still on the mother board Step 3 If no ANDE card is to be installed for an MSCA card remove the four screws fastening the metal standoff on the daughter board and take the four metal standoffs For other mother boards remove the four metal standoffs Installing ANDE card Follow these steps to install ANDE card Step 1 Confirm the correct position of the ANDE card on the Step 2 For MSCA card fasten the four metal standoffs which fasten and support ANDE card For other mother boards fasten the four metal standoffs on the mother board Step 3 Install the ANDE card on the mother board and fasten it with four screws During installation align the two connectors under the daughter board to the connectors on the main board to avoid damage to the connectors CAUTION You should connect a cable to the port with the correct mark Misplugging is pr
240. standard equipping package for the FIC 2FXS FIC 2FXO and the FIC 4FXS FIC 4FXO includes the appropriate number of regular telephone cables Interface cables for the FIC FXS FIC FXO cards Interface cables for FIC 2FXS FIC 2FXO and FIC 4FXS FIC 4FXO are telephone cables with ferrite core For cable pinouts see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual Interface cables for FIC E amp M cards E amp M cards available with H3C Series Routers support Bell I Il Ill V switches and use 2 wire and 4 wire voice implementations 196 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS When connecting a switch to your router a Bell V four wire connection is preferred The following figure shows the pinouts of RJ 45 receptacle on E amp M cards The pins are numbered 1 to 8 from left to right Figure 241 Pinouts of RJ 45 receptacle pad yM When connection is made in Bell V 4 wire mode the pinouts of RJ 45 receptacles at router side and at the switch side are shown in the following figure Figure 242 E amp M interface cable Bell V 4 wire PBX Router on hook ee eee E y T y chodi Se an gy mm 48V M 2 ymu 48V e P A adese ee on hook _ TO To 6 MAN a 4 wire 3 wire RO PE voice signal oo a voice signal T1 T1 5 A Ri m 4 Table 141 Pinouts of E amp M interface cable Bell V 4 wire Router side p i Signal at switch side Bell V RJ 45 Pin Signal 4 wire 1 SB ne
241. stem automatically creates a serial interface for each timeslot bundle formed on a controller T1 interface The interface attributes of the MIM 8T1 and the MIM 8T1 F are given in the following table Table 54 Interface attributes of the MIM 8T1 and the MIM 8T1 F Attribute Description Connector RJ 45 Number of connectors 1 Interface standard G 703 T1 102 G 704 AT amp T TR 54016 AT amp T TR 62411 ANSI T1 403 Interface rate 1 544 Mbps Cable type 8T1 conversion cable Operating mode CT1 ISDN PRI only supported by the MIM 8T1 FT1 only supported by the MIM 8T1 F Supported service 1 Backup 2 Terminal access service 3 ISDN PRI only supported by the MIM 8T1 MIM 8T1 and MIM 8T1 F panels are similar The following figure illustrates an MIM 8T1 panel 96 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES Interface Cable Connecting the Interface Cable N Figure 108 MIM 8T1 panel GOSS LINK O O O o O00000000000000000000000000000000006 o O O OLINK an ACT O O O O o O J IO Oo O O O ACT Bl ft A Q 4 3 A TilcTUPRI 4_5 A i The following table describes the LEDs on the MIM 8T1 8T1 F panel Table 55 Description of the LEDs on the MIM 8T1 MIM 8T1 F panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACTIVE OFF means no data is being transmitted or received ON means data is bei
242. t cap when no fiber is connected to the optical port MIM 2FXS MIM 2FXO MIM 2E amp M and MIM 4FXS MIM 4FXO MIM 4E amp M Introduction N Interface Attributes 2 4 port voice subscriber circuit interface module MIM 2FXS MIM 4FXS serves to access and handle 2 4 channels of ordinary analog phone fax or ATO loop trunk of telephone exchange 2 4 port voice ATO analog trunk interface module MIM 2FXO MIM 4FXO serves to access and handle 2 4 channels of common user lines of telephone exchange 2 4 port voice E amp M analog trunk interface module MIM 2E amp M MIM 4E amp M serves to access and handle 2 4 channels of E amp M analog trunks These modules make it possible to transfer voice signals over data communication networks CAUTION When connecting a voice MIM make sure that H3C Series Routers can be connected to an IP network or other LAN The interface attributes of MIM 2FXS MIM 2FXO MIM 2E amp M and MIM 4FXS MIM 4FXO MIM 4E amp M modules are given in the following table Table 73 Interface attributes of MIM 2FXS MIM 2FXO MIM 2E amp M and MIM 4FXS MIM 4FXO MIM 4E amp M Attribute Description Connector RJ 45 Number of connectors 2 MIM 2FXS MIM 2FXO MIM 2E amp M module 4 MIM 4FXS MIM 4FXO MIM 4E amp M module Cable Telephone cable with ferrite core E amp M trunk for E amp M module which should be made by users depending on the actual needs at the site Interface LEDs MIM 2FXS MIM 2FXO MIM 2E amp
243. t port of the Router and another end to the desired peer device Step 2 Check the status of LINK LED on the FE module panel ON means the link is connected and OFF means the link is not connected In the latter case check the line FIC IMA 4E 1 FIC IMA 8 E1 Introduction Interface Attributes The 4 port 8 port E1 ATM inverse multiplexing interface card FIC IMA 4E 1 FIC IMA 8E1 provides four eight E1 interfaces that support the IMA inverse multiplexing for ATM technology The IMA technology combines multiple low speed links into a group to support a high speed ATM cell stream It distributes an ATM cell stream over multiple low speed E1 links on cell by cell basis at the transmission end and reassembles the cells on the low speed E1 links into the original stream at the far end This technology provides a scalable and cost effective solution and is commonly used in PDH networks to transport ATM cells The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC IMA 4E1 FIC IMA 8E1 Table 157 Interface attributes of the FIC IMA 4E1 FIC IMA 8E1 Description FIC IMA 4E1 120 ohm FIC IMA 4E1 FIC IMA 8E1 FIC IMA 8E1 Attribute 75 ohm 75 ohm 120 ohm Connector DB 68 Number of 1 connectors Interface standard ITU G 703 ITU G 704 Interface rate 2 048 Mbps Interface LEDs Interface Cable FIC IMA 4E 1 FIC IMA 8E1 213 Table 157 Interface attributes of the FIC IMA 4E1 FIC IMA 8E 1 Descri
244. terface impedance and grounding mode Table 48 Correlation between DIP switches of MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 and MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F modules and E1 interface Module MIM 1E1 1E1 F MIM 2E1 2E1 F MIM 4E1 4E1 F DIP switch S1 S1 S2 S1 S3 S4 S5 E1 Interface Interface Interface Interface Interface Interface Interface interface 0 0 1 0 1 2 3 By default all the DIP switches for MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 and MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F modules are set to ON as illustrated in the following figure CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES Figure 96 Default setting of DIP switches for MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 and MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E 1 F modules 5 i i i i I Description of DIP switch settings is given in the following table for MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 and MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E1 F modules Table 49 Description of DIP switch settings of MIM 1E1 MIM 2E1 MIM 4E1 and MIM 1E1 F MIM 2E1 F MIM 4E 1 F modules Configuration of Configuration of DIP Description 75 ohm impedance 120 ohm impedance 1BIT 75 ohm 120 ohm ON OFF 2BIT selection switch ON OFF 3BIT ON OFF ABIT ON OFF 5BIT ON OFF 6BIT RxRing grounding OFF RxRing is mode selection grounded via switch capacitance ON RxRing is grounded directly 7BIT RxShield grounding ON RxShield is mode selection grounded switch OFF RxShield is not grounded
245. tes the FIC 1G SHDSL panel Figure 233 FIC 1G SHDSL panel 16 6081 The following table describes the LEDs on the FIC 1G SHDSL panel Table 136 LEDs on the FIC 1G SHDSL panel LED Description LINK OFF means no link is present ON means a link is present ACT OFF means no data is being transmitted or received blinking means data is being received or and transmitted The FIC 1G SHDSL cards use regular telephone cables for connection You simply need a telephone cable to connect the RJ11 interface on an FIC 1G SHDSL card to PSTN FIC 1POS Introduction Interface Attributes FIC 1POS the 1 port SDH SONET interface card supports interface rates up to 155 52 Mbps STM 1 0C 3 The FIC 1POS uses the protocols such as PPP Frame Relay and HDLC at the data link layer and IP at the network layer It allows direct transmission of packets over SONET SDH It supports a Four types of SFP multi mode short haul 1310 nm single mode medium haul 1310 nm single mode long haul 1310 nm and single mode ultra long haul 1550 nm a 155 52 Mbps fractional interface The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC 1POS 192 Interface LEDs Interface Optical Fiber Connecting the Interface Optical Fiber CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Table 137 Interface attributes of the FIC 1POS Attribute FIC 1POS Connector SFP LC
246. that the Power On Self Test POST of the SIC MIM FIC has failed If the installed SIC MIM FIC is in abnormal state check that m Proper interface cable is used a The LEDs on the panel of SIC MIM FIC are displaying normally see the section introducing the SIC MIM FIC for its LED status and description a The SIC MIM FIC accepts the configuration and works well using the display command 20 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW SIC 1FEA Introduction gt Interface Attributes SMART INTERFACE CARDS MSR series routers adopt modular design and support a wide range of optional smart interface cards SICs and double smart interface cards DSICs A SIC interface card occupies one SIC slot of an MSR router and a DSIC interface card occupies two SIC slots of a router The SIC DSIC series interface cards provide abundant interfaces such as synchronous asynchronous serial interface Ethernet interface E1 T1 ISDN BRI PRI ADSL audio interface Layer 2 switching interface and so on Among this series interface cards the Layer 2 switching interface cards SIC 4FSW and DSIC 9FSW each have a corresponding PoE capable one which can provide 48 VDC power to remote powered devices PDs such as IP phone WLAN AP network camera through straight through cables as long as installed in a PoE router For H3C MSR 20 40 and MSR 30 and 50 series routers which have four SIC slots a 4FSW 1FEF 1FEA 1 GEC 1ADSL 1ADSL I interface card can only be installed
247. the line is faulty and signal is out of synchronization MIM 8ASE MIM 16AS E Module Introduction Interface Attributes Interface LEDs Like AS modules 8 16 port enhanced asynchronous serial interface module MIM 8ASE MIM 16ASE transmits receives and handles asynchronous serial interface data streams But ASE modules use RJ 45 connectors and AUX cables The interface attributes of MIM 8ASE MIM 16ASE are given in the following table Table 45 Interface attributes of MIM 8ASE MIM 16ASE Description Attribute MIM 8ASE module MIM 16ASE module Connector RJ 45 Number of connectors 8 MIM 8ASE 16 MIM 16ASE Interface standard and RS232 operating mode Cable AUX cable Ethernet straight through cable MIM 8ASE MIM 16ASE dumb terminal cable Minimum baud rate bps 300 Maximum baud rate bps 115 2 k Service supported 1 Dialup through Modem 2 Backup 3 Terminal access service 4 Asynchronous leased line service MIM 8ASE panel is shown in the following figure 80 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES Interface Cable AN Connecting the Interface Cable AN N Figure 86 MIM 8ASE panel BASE ft n A h 4 A 2 m A n A A 5 TE fA A MIM 16ASE panel is shown in the following figure Figure 87 MIM 16ASE pane
248. the DFIC 24FXO24FXS module interface should be fixed to avoid loss of them 228 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS ESM VCPM MODULE ANDE Module Introduction Interface Attributes Interface LEDs Installing Removing ANDE Card ANDE advanced network data encryption card supports IPSec and hardware expedited IP data packet encryption thus providing encryption with high performance and reliability a Installed with an ANDE card the main board of your router can implement VPN with encryption provided by the ANDE card in addition to IP packet forwarding The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC HNDE Table 171 Interface attributes of the ANDE module Attribute Description Protocol supported IPSec IPSec concurrent tunnels 100 implemented through software Hardware algorithm key algorithm DES 3DES AES QC5 Blowfish Cast 128 and SkipJack Authentication algorithm HMAC MD5 96 HMAC SHA 1 96 There is no LED on the ANDE module Display of the status of the module is implemented through the ESM interface LED on the main board of the router The following table describes the LEDs on the panel Table 172 Description of the LEDs on the panel LED Description ESMx Green ANDE card is in the slot and is operating normally Yellow ANDE card is in the slot but cannot be accessed by the router Note x means the number of the slot the ESM LED is in ANDE card should be in
249. the card panel OFF means the line has problem Check the line status in this case FIC 1SHL AW 217 FIC 1SHL AW Introduction Interface Attributes Interface LEDs The 1 port dual pair G SHDSL interface card FIC 1SHL 4W provides a four wire G SHDSL interface It adopts TCPAM coding and provides symmetric rates up to 4 624 Mbps The transmission rate of the interface can automatically adapt to line distances and conditions Compared with ADSL G SHDSL allows farther transmission distance and thus has a wider application scope It is an alternative to E1 T1 line for high speed data service access However as TCPAM uses the band starting from 0 Hz for data transmission G SHDSL cannot share the same line with POTS or ISDN like what ADSL has done The FIC 1SHL 4W has these features Supporting manual G SHDSL line activation deactivation and easy to use fault location tools m Supporting G 992 1 interface standard and auto sensing a Allowing you to set the dual pair G SHDSL interface to operate in dual pair or single pair mode Table 161 Interface attributes of the FIC 1SHL AW Attribute Connector Number of connectors Interface standard Interface rate Interface cable Supported services FIC 1SHL AW RJ 11 1 ITU T G991 2 ITU T G994 1 handshaking In single pair mode supports the sending receiving independent symmetric rates in the range from 192 kbps to 2312 kbps in steps of 8 kbps In dua
250. the host or the card may be problematic 1 Check that the card is securely connected to the host ACTIVE LED is solid ON or OFF when the card is operating The system bus is not working properly 2 Contact your sales agent for help the host or the card may be problematic FIC 2VE1 Introduction gt Interface Attributes Interface LEDs 2 port E1 voice interface module FIC 2VE1 can handle dense voice signals in VoIP system It provides two CE1 PRI R2 ports allowing the access of 60 channels of voice signals a VCPM is provided to users together with FIC 2VE1 Users can select VPM module as needed a VPM module is installed on the main board of FIC 2VE1 The interface attributes of FIC 2VE1 are given in the following table Table 145 Interface attributes of FIC 2VE1 Attribute Description Connector DB 15 Number of connectors 2 Operating mode CE1 ISDN PRI R2 Interface rate 2 048 Mbps Cable E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable 75ohm to 1200hm adapter Network interface connector Supported service 1 R2 signaling 2 DSS 3 IP Fax signaling 4 General VoIP features in Comware FIC 2VE1 panel is shown in the following figure 200 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Figure 244 FIC 2VE1 panel ACT O a CEUPRIR2 4 Description of the LEDs on FIC 2VE1 panel is given in the following table Table 146 Description of th
251. the two ends use RJ 45 The following figure illustrates this type of cable 208 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS N Connecting the Interface Cable N Figure 255 T1 cable RJ45 RJ45 CH You can also use a network interface connector to extend the FIC 1VTI cable 8 i CAUTION The corresponding cables are not included in the standard shipment package of FIC 1VT1 Please order them together with FIC 1VT1 By default they are not supplied CAUTION a You should connect a cable to the port with the correct mark Misplugging is prone to impair the card and even damage the router m When using T1 cable outdoors you are recommended to install a special lightning arrester on the input end of the cable in order to avoid lightning more effectively If the FIC has been properly installed follow these steps to connect the cable Step 1 Plug one end of T1 cable into the RJ45 connector of FIC 1VT1 Step 2 Connect the other end of T1 cable to the peer device Step 3 Check the status of LINK LED on the FIC 1VT1 panel OFF means the link is not connected In the latter case check the line FIC 16FSW FIC 16FSW PoE DFIC 24FSW DFIC 24FSW PoE Introduction The 16 24 port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Layer 2 switching MIM interface module FIC 16FSW FIC 16FSW PoE DFIC 24FSW DFIC 24FSW PoE is used on H3C MSR 50 series router A router installed with FIC 16FSW DFIC
252. to be connected m directly if the cable is long enough or m after extending the cable if it is not long enough as shown in the following figure Figure 107 Extending a T1 cable T1 cable 100 ohm straight through shielding network cable Network interface connector AN Router X ll vf DDN etc RJ45 ight RJ45 Straight through network cable Step 3 Check the behavior of the LINK LED on the MIM T1 or MIM T1 F panel It is OFF when the line is faulty and signal is out of synchronization In this case check the link MIM 8T1 MIM 8T1 F Module 95 MIM 8T1 MIM 8T1 F Module Introduction gt Interface Attributes Interface LEDs MIM 8T1 module MIM 8T1 the 8 port channelized T1 PRI interface module transmits receives and processes eight channels of T1 data traffic In addition you can use the module for other purposes such as CT1 access and the ISDN PRI function MIM 8T1 F module MIM 8T1 F the 8 port fractional T1 interface module is different from the 8T1 module in the sense that m The FI1 operating mode supported by the MIM 8T1 F module allows only one n x 64 kbps or n x 56 kbps bundle to be formed on each interface where n 1 to 24 However the MIM 8T1 module allows arbitrary grouping of 24 channels and therefore multiple bundles a The MIM 8T1 F module does not support PRI mode Given a MIM 8T1 module the sy
253. to the remote network equipment through a 75 ohm E1 trunk cable if cable extension is needed CAUTION The wire marked TX in the E1 cable should be connected to the peer wire marked RX and the wire marked RX should be connected to the peer wire marked TX Figure 23 Extending an E1 75 ohm non balanced coaxial cable B 15 NC BNC Network Router 7 N devices EN H 9 such as DDN Coaxial connector 75 ohm E1 trunk cable 75 ohm non balanced coaxial cable If the remote device has 120 ohm interface it is needed to use a 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter or use a 120 ohm cable 2 When the E1 cable is a 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable a Directly connect the RJ 45 connector of the cable to the RJ 45 port of the remote eguipment if there is no need to extend the E1 cable or Connect the RJ 45 connector of the cable to the network connector and the other end of the network connector to the network eguipment through a 120 ohm E1 trunk cable if cable extension is needed SIC 1TPRI SIC 1T1 F 33 Figure 24 Extending an E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable DB 15 RJ 45 RJ 45 Network devices such Router a as DDN Network interface connector 120 ohm balanced twisted pair 120 ohm E1 trunk cable Step 4 Check the status of LINK LED on the SIC 1EPRI SIC 1E1 F panel ON means the link is connected and OFF means
254. ttributes of the SIC 1T1 F Attribute Description Interface standard G 703 T1 102 G 704 AT amp T TR 54016 AT amp T TR 62411 ANSI T1 403 Interface rate 1 544 Mbps Cable type T1 cable 100 ohm standard shielded cable Operation mode CT1 ISDN PRI Services Backup Terminal access ISDN Interface LEDs The following figure illustrates the SIC 1VT1 panel Figure 45 SIC 1VT1 panel F ADU Or ee LINK O ACT SIC GOO irr aad vl The following table describes the LEDs on the SIC 1VT1 panel Table 24 Description on SIC 1VT1 LED LED Description LINK ON means carrier signal is received OFF means no carrier signal is received ACT OFF No data is being received and transmitted Blinking Data is being received and transmitted Interface Cable The interface cable of SIC 1VT1 is a standard 100 ohm standard shielding cable The connectors on the two ends use RJ 45 The following figure illustrates this type of cable A Connecting the Interface Cable A SIC 1ADSL 51 Figure 46 T1 cable RJ45 R45 For the pinouts of T1 cables see Low End and Mid Range Series Routers Cable Manual CAUTION The corresponding cables are not included in the standard shipment package of SIC 1VT1 Please order them together with SIC 1VT1 By default they are n
255. ug and at the network end are two BNC receptacles Figure 200 E1 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial cable To extend an E1 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial cable you can select a pair of coaxial connectors with a BNC receptacle at each end to connect the BNC receptacles of the cable each to a 75 ohm unbalanced coaxial cable with BNC connectors a 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable As shown in the following figure at the router end of the cable is a DB 15 plug and at the network end is an RJ 45 connector Figure 201 E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable X2 FIC 1E1 FIC 2E1 FIC 4E1 and FIC 1E1 F FIC 2E1 F FIC 4E1 F 165 To extend an E1 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable you can select a network connector with an RJ 45 receptacle at each end to connect the cable to another 120 ohm balanced twisted pair cable In addition you are available with 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapters E1 cable coaxial connector network connector and 75 ohm to 120 ohm adapter are all optional accessories Please order them together with E1 FIC 2E1 and FIC 1E1 F FIC 2E1 F By default they are not provided Interface cable of the FIC 4E1 FIC 4E1 F FIC 4E1 FIC 4E1 F provides two types of 1 to 4 adapter cables 120 ohm 4E1 and 75 ohm 4E1 At one end of both cables is a DB 25 connector for connecting the router and at the other end are four DB 15 connectors for connecting E1 cabl
256. ure 176 CHAPTER 4 FLEXIBLE INTERFACE CARDS Figure 218 Extending aT1 cable T1 cable 100 ohm straight through shielding network cable RJ45 Network interface connector Router DDN etc RJ45 Straight through cabl Step 3 Power on the router and check the behavior of the LINK LED on the card panel OFF means fault occurs on the line Check the line status FIC 8T1 FIC 8T1 F Introduction gt Interface Attributes FIC 8T1 FIC 8T1 the 8 port channelized T1 PRI interface card transmits receives and processes eight channels of T1 data traffic In addition you can use the card for other purposes such as CT1 access and the ISDN PRI function FIC 8T1 F FIC 8T1 F the 8 port fractional T1 interface card is different from the FIC 8T1 card in the sense that m The FT1 operating mode supported by the FIC 8T1 F card allows only one n x 64 kbps or n x 56 kbps bundle to be formed on each interface where n 1 to 24 However the FIC 8T1 card allows arbitrary grouping of 24 channels and therefore multiple bundles m The FIC 8T1 F card does not support PRI mode Given a FIC 8T1 card the system automatically creates a serial interface for each timeslot bundle formed on a controller T1 interface The following table describes the interface attributes of the FIC 8T1 FIC 8T1 F card Table 120 LEDs on the FIC 8T1 and FI
257. us of LINK LED on the GBE panel ON means the Rx link is connected and OFF means the Rx link is not connected In the latter case check the line Connecting Ethernet electrical interface cable Step 1 Use a crossover cable for the connection to a PC router and straight through cable to a Hub LAN Switch Plug one end of the cable to an Ethernet port of the Router and another end to the desired peer device SIC 1VE1 45 Step 2 Check the status of LINK LED on the GEC panel ON means the link is connected and OFF means the link is not connected In the latter case check the line SIC 1VE1 Introduction 1 port E1 voice interface card SIC 1VE1 can handle dense voice signals in VoIP system It provides a CE1 PRI R2 port allowing the access of 30 channels of voice signals i gt a When purchasing a SIC 1VE1 interface card users should purchase a VCPM and configure a VPM based on voice traffic a No VCPM is required but only a VPM needs to be installed on the main board when MSR 20 1x series routers need to be equipped with a SIC 1VE1 interface card a VCPM and VPM need to be installed on the main board when MSR 30 series routers need to be equipped with a SIC 1VE1 interface card a VCPM and VPM need to be installed on the MSCA card when MSR 50 series routers need to be equipped with a SIC 1VE1 interface card Interface Attributes Table 20 Interface Attributes of the SIC 1VE1 Attribute Description Connector DB 15 Numb
258. will be provided to you UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT LEGEND If you are a United States government agency then this documentation and the software described herein are provided to you subject to the following All technical data and computer software are commercial in nature and developed solely at private expense Software is delivered as Commercial Computer Software as defined in DFARS 252 227 7014 June 1995 or as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a and as such is provided with only such rights as are provided in 3Com s standard commercial license for the Software Technical data is provided with limited rights only as provided in DFAR 252 227 7015 Nov 1995 or FAR 52 227 14 June 1987 whichever is applicable You agree not to remove or deface any portion of any legend provided on any licensed program or documentation contained in or delivered to you in conjunction with this User Guide Unless otherwise indicated 3Com registered trademarks are registered in the United States and may or may not be registered in other countries 3Com and the 3Com logo are registered trademarks of 3Com Corporation ce lt H3C H3C Aolynk ae ynn H3Care Yew TOP G TOPG IRF NetPilot Neocean NeoVTL SecPro SecPoint SecEngine SecPath Comware Secware Storware NOA VVG V2G VnG PSPT XGbus N Bus TiGem InnoVision and HUASAN are trademarks of Hangzhou H3C Technologies Co Ltd a 3Com company All other trademarks that
259. wo optical fibers Rx to Tx and Tx to Rx Step 3 Power on the router and check the behavior of the LINK LED on the MIM 1GEF MIM 2GEF panel ON means an Rx link is present and OFF means the opposite In the latter case check the line status 74 CHAPTER 3 MULTIFUNCTIONAL INTERFACE MODULES MIM 2SAE MIM 4SAE MIM 8SAE Module Introduction Interface Attributes Interface LEDs MIM 2SAE MIM 4SAE MIM 8SAE stands for 2 4 8 port enhanced high speed synchronous asynchronous serial interface module In terms of function SAE modules are the same as SA modules except that SAE modules support more protocols for example RS449 X 21 and RS530 The interface attributes of SAE modules are given in the following table Table 43 Interface attributes of MIM 2SAE MIM 4SAE MIM 8SAE Description Attribute Synchronous Asynchronous Connector DB 28 Number of connectors 2 MIM 2SAE 4 MIM 4SAE 8 MIM 8SAE Interface standard and V 24 V 35 RS449 RS232 operating mode X 21 RS530 DTE DCE DTE DCE Minimum baud rate 1200 1200 300 bps Maximum baud rate 64 k 2 048 M 115 2 bps Cable V 24 RS232 DTE cable V 24 RS232 DCE cable V 35 DTE cable V 35 DCE cable X 21 DTE cable X 21 DCE cable RS449 DTE cable RS449 DCE cable RS530 DTE cable RS530 DCE cable Supported service 1 DDN leased line 1 Dialup through modems 2 Terminal access service 2 Backup 3 Asynchronous leased line 4 Dumb terminal access MIM 2SAE pan
260. work end RS530 DCE cable DB 25 female connector at the network end At one end of these cables is a DB 28 connector and at the other end is the connector that varies with the port at the network side V 24 DTE cable Figure 8 V24 DTE cable nen E lo 8 S x2 a V 24 DCE cable Figure 9 V 24 DCE cable ma me o Pa E E lo a j m U a Wi nN co y2 XI a V 35 DTE cable Figure 10 V 35 DTE cable oooeeoose OOO6eesees O coeeeoee O cC Bu lt armw i Ol OOOO amp GO 4ouAm gt 8 AAESMero a V 35 DCE cable 26 CHAPTER 2 SMART INTERFACE CARDS Figure 11 V 35 DCE cable B Pos 2 amp CI M S pgs Wain s w 3808 amp B 2090 2 2630 9696 L Pos 1 0505 XI OGO x2 aati N P R SULY Wy Xo AA cc BBpp a
261. working as DTE interface and internal clock when working as DCE interface m Three test measures local cell loopback local payload loopback and remote loopback For the ATM interface configuration procedures refer to H3C MSR 20 30 50 Series Routers User Manual The following table describes the interface attributes of the ATM cards Table 133 Interface attributes of the ATM cards Attribute FIC 1ATM OC3MM _ FIC 1ATM OC3SM FIC 1ATM OC3SML Fiber optic connector SC Number of connectors 1 Interface standard SONET OC 3 SDH STM 1 Interface rate 155 Mbps Interface LEDs Table 133 Attribute FIC 1ATM OC3MM FIC 1ATM OC3SM FIC 1ATM OC3SML FIC 1ATM OC3MM Interface attributes of the ATM cards FIC 1ATM OC3SM 189 FIC 1ATM OC3SML Max transmission segment over the 2 km 1 2 mi over the multi mode 15 km 9 3 mi over the single mode Single mode optical fiber of 30km selected cable optical fiber optical fiber transmission distance Transmitter LED Laser Laser Optical transmitter Min 21dBm Min 15dBm Min 5dBm paer Max 14dBm Max 8dBm Max OdBm Receiver sensitivity Min 28 dBm Min 30 dBm Min 34 dBm Max 8 dBm Max 14 dBm Max 10 dBm Central wavelength 1310 nm Supported service ATM traffic CBR rt_VBR nrt_VBR UBR The following figure illustrates the FIC 1ATM OC3MM panel Figure 230 FIC 1ATM OC3MM panel GLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
262. you Step 2 Turn off the power switch of the Router and unplug the power cord Installing Removing a MIM Installation Removal of a SIC MIM FIC 17 Step 3 Take out the SIC and align its remote edge with the edge of the slot on the Router s rear panel Step 4 Push the SIC into the Router until it closely mates with the rear panel of the Router Step 5 Fasten the SIC into the Router with captive screws Step 6 Power on the Router and check the LEDs of the corresponding slot on the front panel after the initialization of the SIC ON means that the SIC is operating normally and OFF means that its Power On Self Test POST has failed In the latter case please contact your agent Figure 2 Installing SIC Removing a SIC Follow these steps to remove a SIC Step 1 Place the rear panel of the Router towards you Step 2 Turn off the power switch of the Router and unplug the power cord Step 3 Unplug all the network interface cables connected to the rear panel of the Router Step 4 Remove the captive screws on both sides of the SIC using the flat module screwdriver Step 5 Pull the SIC outward until it is completely taken out of the Router chassis Tools reguired a Flat module screwdriver a ESD preventive wrist strap and ESD preventive glove Installing a MIM Follow these steps to install a MIM Step 1 Place the rear panel of the Router towards you Step 2 Turn off the power switch of the Router and unplug t

3Com H3C Owner's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents